Yamaha V150 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: V150

Categorie: Ontvanger

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

RX-V1500

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WD64170

RX-V1500

AV Receiver

OWNER'S MANUAL

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use

a clean, dry cloth for cleaning.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven

surfaces may cause the product and cart

combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on

the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord

from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time

(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall

outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit

in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from

the wall outlet.

18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply. Voltages are:

General model............. AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz

Asia model ..................................AC 220/230-240V, 50/60 Hz

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even

if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the

standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

English

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel ................................................................. 4

Remote control........................................................... 6

Using the remote control ........................................... 8

Front panel display .................................................... 9

Rear panel ................................................................ 11

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12

Speaker placement ................................................... 12

Speaker connections ................................................ 13

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 17

Before connecting components................................ 17

Connecting video components................................. 18

Connecting audio components................................. 21

Connecting the antennas.......................................... 23

Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 24

Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 25

Turning on the power............................................... 25

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26

Introduction.............................................................. 26

Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26

Starting the setup ..................................................... 27

BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 31

Using BASIC MENU .............................................. 31

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 33

Basic operations....................................................... 33

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 34

Additional operations............................................... 35

Selecting input modes.............................................. 40

TUNING ................................................................ 41

Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 41

Presetting stations .................................................... 42

Selecting preset stations........................................... 44

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 44

RECORDING ....................................................... 45

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................46

For movie/video sources.......................................... 46

For music sources .................................................... 49

ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................50

Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 50

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 50

Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 51

Using the test tone ................................................... 52

SET MENU ............................................................53

Using SET MENU................................................... 54

Using SOUND MENU ............................................ 55

Using INPUT MENU .............................................. 60

Using OPTION MENU ........................................... 62

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................65

Control area ............................................................. 65

Setting remote control codes ................................... 66

Programming codes from other remote controls

(Learn) ................................................................. 68

Changing source names in the display window....... 70

Using the Macro feature .......................................... 71

Clearing function sets .............................................. 73

Clearing individual functions .................................. 74

Controlling each component.................................... 76

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

(U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND

AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) .....................77

Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 77

Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 78

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......80

What is a sound field? ............................................. 80

Changing parameter settings ................................... 80

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................82

TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................86

GLOSSARY...........................................................91

Audio formats .......................................................... 91

Sound field programs............................................... 92

Audio information ................................................... 93

Video signal information ......................................... 94

SPECIFICATIONS...............................................95

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FEATURES

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8 Ω)

Front: 120 W + 120 W

Center: 120 W

Surround: 120 W + 120 W

Surround Back: 120 W + 120 W

Sound field features

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

◆ THX Select

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS

Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

◆ RDS: Radio Data System receiving capability (U.K.

and Europe models only)

Other features

◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer for automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ SET MENU to optimize this unit for your audio/video

system

◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi

channel input

◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this

unit

◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and

PCM sources

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔

S-video → component video) capability for monitor

out

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening mode

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and

learning/macro capability

◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models

only)

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd.

Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and

Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is

often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group

recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

FEATURES

GETTING STARTED

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings on

the inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the

operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator

does not flash, or its light or display window become dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

Remote control

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China,

Korea, Asia and General

models)

AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphone

75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

Speaker terminal wrench

Power Cord

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia,

China and Korea models)

(U.K., Europe and

Australia models)

Installing batteries in the remote

control

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the remote control code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will

be a 6 to 7-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in

order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.

2 INPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

3 PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when

turned on (see page 37).

4 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

5 PRESET/TUNING EDIT

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

between selecting preset station numbers and tuning.

6 FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO

indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off).

9 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

0 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

A SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT MODE

PURE DIRECT

INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

FM/AM

EDIT

SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

MEMORY

PHONES

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PRESET/

TUNING

PRESET/

TUNING

MODE

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT

EFFECT

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

TUNER

YPAO

1 24 0

ABC DEFGH K

MNOL

EON PTY SEEK

MODE START

RDS MODE

/FREQ

67 85

(U.S.A. model)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

B MULTI CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input

selector buttons on the remote control).

C INPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 40).

D OPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied

microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see

page 26).

E A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).

F PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station number 1 through 8 when a colon (:)

is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel

display.

Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not

displayed.

G PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for listening with headphones.

When you connect headphones, no signals are output to

the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.

All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down

to the left and right headphone channels.

H VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from an external source such

as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these

jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.

I TONE CONTROL

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right

and center channels (see page 35).

J PROGRAM

Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble

balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).

K STRAIGHT/EFFECT

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

■ U.K. and Europe models only

L RDS MODE/FREQ

Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station

to cycle the display mode between the PS mode, PTY

mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS

data services) and/or the frequency display mode.

M EON

Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,

INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically.

N PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode.

O PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after the

desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK

mode.

■ Opening and closing the front panel

door

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel

door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of

the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these

controls.

To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. To operate other

components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on

page 65.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 Transmission indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

4 Display window

Shows the name of the selected source component that

you can control.

5 PRESET +/–

Selects preset station numbers when this unit is in tuner

mode.

6 A/B/C/D/E

Selects preset groups when this unit is in tuner mode.

7 LEVEL

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the

level.

8 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER

Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or SET

MENU items.

9 TEST

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

0 Sound field program/Numeric buttons

Use to select sound field programs or input numbers.

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when

this unit is in tuner mode.

A MACRO ON/OFF

Turns the macro function on and off.

B MACRO

Use to program a series of operations for control by a

single button (see page 71).

C STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

D SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

E INPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 40).

F SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

G MULTI CH IN

Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external

decoder (etc.).

Remote control

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

H SELECT k/n

Selects another component that you can control

independently of the input component selected with the

input selector buttons.

I VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

J AMP/SOURCE/TV

Selects the component you want to control with the

remote control.

AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit.

SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component

selected with an input selector button.

TV: Set to this position to operate the television.

To set the remote control codes for components, see

page 66.

K MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level.

L PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 37).

M SET MENU

Selects the SET MENU mode.

N NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 38).

O ON SCREEN

Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD)

this unit sends to your monitor.

P STRAIGHT/EFFECT

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

Q EXTD. SUR

Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of

multi-channel software.

R RE-NAME

Used to change the input source name in the display

window (see page 70).

S CLEAR

Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn and

rename features, or setting remote control codes (see

page 73).

T LEARN

Used to set up the remote control code or program

functions from other remote controls (see pages 66 and

68).

■ U.K. and Europe models only

U RDS tuning buttons

(Available when this unit is in tuner mode)

FREQ/RDS

Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station

to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT

mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data

services) and/or the frequency display.

EON

Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,

INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically.

PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode.

PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after the

desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK

mode.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity such as near a bath

– high temperature such as near a heater or stove

– extremely low temperature

– dusty places

Using the remote control

SPEAKERS

MULTI CH

INPUT MODE

INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

FM/AM

EDIT

PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L

VIDEO AUX

AUDIO R OPTICAL

MEMORY

SILENT

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PRESET/

TUNING

PRESET

/TUNING

TUNING

MODE

MIC

TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT

EFFECT

VOLUME

PROGRAM

INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

30 30

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

1 Decoder indicators

When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective

indicator lights up.

2 Sound field indicators

Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

3 NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select night listening mode.

4 Input source indicators

A cursor lights to show the current input source.

5 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

6 YPAO indicator

Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the

auto setup speaker settings are used without any

modifications.

7 AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

8 STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

9 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

0 THX indicator

Lights up when a THX program is selected.

A PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

B SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

C VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 39).

D Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

E SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are

selected, or when bi-wiring.

F SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 35).

G Multi-information display

Shows the current sound field program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

H HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program.

I MEMORY indicator

Blinks to show a station can be stored.

J TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

K MUTE indicator

Blinks while the MUTE function is on.

Front panel display

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

NIGHT

VIRTUAL

ZONE2

ZONE3

ZONE4

SLEEP

YPAO

HiFi DSP

STEREO

TUNED

EON

AUTO

MEMORY

MUTE

VOLUME

DIGITAL

MATRIX

DISCRETE

PCM

THX

SILENT

CINEMA

A B

LFE

96/24

LL C R

SL SB SR

PL x

PS PTY RT CT

PTY

HOLD

AFGHK

135678

DIJ

NO0

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and

Australia models only)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field

Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround back DSP sound field

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

L 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

M LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.

N Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of current digital input

signal.

O Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back

speakers when using the SPEAKERS setting (page 32) or

SP LEVEL setting (page 57).

P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on.

Q RDS indicators

(U.K. and Europe models only)

The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently

received RDS station light(s) up.

EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON

data service is being received.

PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the

PTY SEEK mode.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

See page 21 for details.

2 Audio component jacks

See page 21 for connection information.

3 Video component jacks

See pages 18 and 20 for connection information.

4 RS-232C terminal

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.

Consult your dealer for details.

5 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

See page 77 for connection information.

6 CONTROL OUT jack

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

See page 77 for connection information.

7 AC OUTLET(S)

Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see

page 24).

8 AC INLET (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe,

Australia, China and Korea models only)

Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see

page 24).

9 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See pages 18, 20 and 21 for details.

0 MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 19 for connection information.

A ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models only)

See page 77 for connection information.

B Antenna terminals

See page 23 for connection information.

C PRE OUT jacks

See page 22 for connection information.

D Speaker terminals

See page 13 for connection information.

E PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia

models)

PRESENCE speaker terminals

(other models)

See page 14 for connection information.

< Asia and General models only >

FREQUENCY STEP switch

See page 23.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

See page 24.

Rear panel

AC OUTLETS

GND

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND BACK

/PRESENCE

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MONITOR OUT

MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVR/

VCR 2

VCR 1

CD-R

FRONT (6CH)/SB (8CH)

SURROUND

TUNER

ANT

GND

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DTV

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

TAP E

CD-R

DVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

DVD

DVR/

VCR 2

COAXIAL

–

––

–

PRESENCE/ZONE 2

CONTROL OUTREMOTE

IN OUT

+12V 15mA MAX.

SINGLE

RS-232C

AC OUTLETS

12 3 54678

EDCBA09

(U.S.A. model)

SPEAKER SETUP

For best results, place the speakers as illustrated below.

The illustrations show the standard speaker setting recommended

by the ITU-R (see page 93). You can use it to enjoy CINEMA

DSP, multi-channel audio sources, and THX.

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the

listening position and at the same height as the surround

speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)

apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width

as the front speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

Presence speakers (PR and PL)

Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA

DSP (see page 46). These effects include sounds that

filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the

screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place

these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m

(1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly

inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in

SOUND MENU (see page 60).

SPEAKER SETUP

Speaker placement

More than 30 cm (12 in)

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

1.8 m (6 ft)

Note

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

■ Di-pole speaker layout

Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used

for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please

place the surround and surround back speakers according

to the speaker layout below.

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set

this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6

ohms before using (see page 25).

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the

power of this unit is off.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do

not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This

could damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3 Loosen the knob.

The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for

loosening or tightening knobs.

4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

SBR

SBL

30˚ 30˚

: Di-pole speaker

: Direction of di-pole speaker

Speaker connections

CAUTION

10 mm (3/8 in)

SPEAKER SETUP

5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or

PRESENCE speaker terminals

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each

terminal.

3 Return the tab to secure the wire.

■ Banana plug connections

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and

PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one

banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not

attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Speaker terminal wrench

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe

and Asia models)

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

RC-232C

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

–

––

–

PRESENCE/ZONE 2

SINGLE

231

7 8 6

Subwoofer with

built-in amplifier

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back speakers

LeftRight

Left

Right LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

Speaker layout

(U.S.A. model)

LeftRight

Presence speakers

• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set

to prioritize either set of speakers in SOUND MENU (see page 60).

• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only

operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on.

• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields

are selected.

SPEAKER SETUP

■ FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the

FRONT A or B terminals.

The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems

simultaneously.

Bi-wired connection

The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to

one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for

each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the

tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press

SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so

that both SP A and B light up in the front panel display.

■ CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

■ SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers to these terminals.

■ SUBWOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

■ SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you

only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the

left (L) terminals.

■ PRESENCE terminals

Connect presence speakers to these terminals.

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only)

You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see

page 64).

Note

Bi-wired connection

FRONT

–

This unit

Note

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains

power until all connections between components are

complete.

■ Cable indications

■ Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this

unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs

to the left jacks.

■ Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the

analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the

digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

Dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect

the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are

not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in

place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit

are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO

jacks. When V CONV. is set to “ON” (see page 63),

signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output

through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can

also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.

VIDEO jack

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jack

For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (P

B, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO

jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

Note

CAUTION

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

Note

VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Signal flow inside this unit

Only when V CONV. is set to ON

(see page 63)

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for DVD playback

Connecting video components

GND

SUR

SUB

WOO

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MONITOR OUT

MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

VIDEO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

MAIN/SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVD

DTV

COAXIAL

DVD player

Video

monitor

(U.S.A. model)

Optical out Video out

Audio out

Video in

Coaxial out

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-

amplifier.

If you set MULTI CH INPUT 6ch/8ch to “8ch” (see page 62), you can use input jacks assigned as MULTI CH INPUT

FRONT (page 62) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.

Notes

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDIO AUDIO

DVD

DTV

CBL

/SAT

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

DVR/

VCR 2

VCR 1

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

LRLR

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Multi-format player/

External decoder

For 6-channel input For 8-channel input

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Front out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Surround

back out

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for other video components

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as

a game console or camcorder, to this unit.

GND

SURR

SUB

WOO

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVR/

VCR 2

VCR 1

CD-R

MAIN/SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DTV

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVD

DVR/

VCR2

COAXIAL

LR LR

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

(U.S.A. model)

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out Video out

Video in

Audio in

Connect a YAMAHA

CD recorder that

outputs OSD signals.

Coaxial out

S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

Game

console or

video camera

Video out

S-video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

Optical out

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connections for audio components

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in

the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some record players.

Connecting audio components

GND

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT

AUDIO AUDIO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVD

DTV

COAXIAL

SURROUND

MAIN/SURROUND BACK

LR LR

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

(U.S.A. model)

CD recorder

Turntable

Optical out

Coaxial out

Audio out

Audio inAudio out

Optical in

Audio in

Audio out

GND

Some CD recorders can

be connected to the

VIDEO CD-R jacks

(see page 20).

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting to an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.

• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the

external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.

• The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER

PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.

• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see

page 64), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE

OUT jacks.

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel line output jacks.

2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel line output jacks.

3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT

jacks

Surround back or presence channel line output jacks.

5 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel line output jack.

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the

corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround

back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals

output from SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks

may not correspond to the correct speakers.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by

using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker

levels” on page 51).

• Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE

OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 55) and

LFE/BASS OUT (see page 56) settings.

Notes

FRONT

SURROUND

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND BACK

/PRESENCE

CENTER

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it

to the terminals on this unit.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND

terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

1 Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

2 Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

3 Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

4 Insert the cable

wire into the slot,

and clamp it with

pliers.

5 Snap the cover

into place.

■ FREQUENCY STEP switch

(Asia and General models only)

Because the interstation frequency

spacing differs in different areas, set

the FREQUENCY STEP switch

(locating on the rear panel) according

to the frequency spacing in your area.

• North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz

• Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s AC power

cord from the wall outlet.

Connecting the antennas

MAI

SURR

SUB

WOOF

TUNER

ANT

GND

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

COMPONENT VIDEO

NITOR OUT

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference,

connect the antenna

GND terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

Notes

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Unit:

mm (in)

Lead wire

Clamp

Insert wire

into slot

100kHz/10kHz

FREQUENCY

STEP

50kHz/9kHz

FM AM

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting the AC power cord

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia,

China and Korea models)

Plug the power cord into the AC inlet after all other

connections are complete, then plug the power cord to an

AC wall outlet.

Do not use other AC power cords. Use the one provided.

Use of other power cords may result in fire hazard or

electrical shock.

(Other models)

Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models.............................. 1 OUTLET

Korea model .............................................................. None

Other models.................................................. 2 OUTLETS

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

other components to this unit. Power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets

will supply power to any connected component whenever

this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is:

Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W

Other models ........................................................... 100 W

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply.

Voltages are:

General model........AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz

Asia model............................AC 220/230-240V, 50/60 Hz

■ Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost.

Connecting the power supply cord

AC OUTLETS

(U.S.A. model)

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model)

CAUTION

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to

6 ohms as follows before turning on the power.

Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.

1 On the front panel, while holding down

SPEAKERS A, press STANDBY/ON.

“SP IMP.SET” appears in the front panel display for a

few seconds, then “Minimum 8ohms” appears.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or SPEAKERS B to

select the impedance of your speakers.

You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms.

3 Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting.

This unit will be set to the standby mode.

You can also use SP IMP.SET (see page 63) to set the speaker

impedance.

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power of this

unit.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

Press STANDBY/ON again (STANDBY on the remote control)

to enter the standby mode.

Speaker impedance setting

CAUTION

SPEAKERS

STANDBY

/ON

SP IMP.SET

Minimum 8ohms

Turning on the power

Note

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

AMP

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO SETUP

This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you

avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and

achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound

your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

The basic setup feature (page 31) is useful if you want to set up

your system quickly and with minimal effort. However, we

recommend that you come back and perform auto setup later to

take advantage of YPAO and enjoy even higher fidelity.

• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the auto setup procedure.

• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,

follow the troubleshooting on page 29.

YPAO performs the following checks and makes

appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible

sound from your system.

WIRING

Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of

each speaker.

DISTANCE

Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening

position and adjusts the timing of each channel.

SIZE

Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the

appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.

EQUALIZING

Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric

equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and

create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly

important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers

for some channels or have a room with unique sonic

characteristics.

YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three

parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the

seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly

precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.

LEVEL

Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each

speaker.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

• After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be

sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.

–Keep it away from direct sunlight.

–Do not place it on top of this unit.

2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat

level surface with the omni-directional

microphone head upward, at your normal

listening position.

If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer

mic at the same height as your ears would be when

you are seated in your listening position.

AUTO SETUP

Introduction

Notes

Optimizer microphone setup

Notes

VIDEO AUXSILENT

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALL R

OPTIMIZER

MIC

TUNER

YPAO

(U.S.A. model)

Optimizer microphone position

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible

during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too

much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover

frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and

set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

1 Switch on this unit and video monitor.

Make sure the OSD is displayed (see page 50).

2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

3 Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP, then

press h once to enter the main menu.

4 Press k / n repeatedly to select WIRING,

DISTANCE, SIZE, EQUALIZING or LEVEL.

5 When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is

selected, press l / h to select:

CHECK

To automatically check and adjust the selected

item.

SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no

adjustments

When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure

that “SMALL” or “SMLx2” is selected in SPEAKER SET

(page 55) and that 80Hz (THX) is selected in CROSS

OVER (page 57).

When EQUALIZING is selected, press l / h

to select:

FRONT To adjust the frequency response of

each speaker in accordance with the

sound of your front speakers.

Recommended if your front speakers

are of much higher quality than your

other speakers.

FLAT To average the frequency response of

all speakers. Recommended if all of

your speakers are of similar quality.

LOW To average the frequency response of

all speakers, giving priority to the

accuracy of bass frequencies.

MID To average the frequency response of

all speakers, giving priority to the

accuracy of mid-range frequencies.

HIGH To average the frequency response of

all speakers, giving priority to the

accuracy of high frequencies.

SKIP To skip the selected item and perform

no adjustments.

6 Press n to select SETUP, then press l / h to

select:

AUTO To automatically perform the entire

auto setup procedure.

STEP To pause for confirmation between

each check in the auto setup procedure.

RELOAD To restore the last auto setup setting.

Starting the setup

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN

MAX

Subwoofer

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

SET MENU

AMP

SOURCE

then

ENTER



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

: Up/Down

: Enter

</>

Note

AUTO:MENU

.WIRING;;;;;CHECK

DISTANCE;;;CHECK

SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK

EQUALIZING;;FLAT

LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK

SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

START PUSH

: Up/Down

: Select

</>

AUTO SETUP

7 Press n to select START PUSH i, then press

Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and

WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure.

If “E-10:OTHER ERROR” appears during testing, restart the

procedure from step 3.

If you selected “AUTO” in step 6

The RESULT display appears for a few seconds after each

check, then settings of the next item will start. The

RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set.

You can display each result by pressing k once and pressing h

repeatedly before exiting. Pressing n returns to the

RESULT:EXIT display.

8 To apply the changes, press l / h to select

SET, then press n to exit.

To cancel the auto setup procedure, press

l / h to select CANCEL, then press n to exit.

If you selected “STEP” in step 6

The RESULT display appears after each check.

8 Press l / h to display RESULT:EXIT, then

press l / h to select:

Then press n to proceed and check the next item.

EXIT Then press n to exit the auto setup.

• Press k / n repeatedly to move between each display.

• If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually

adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters

(see page 55).

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, perform AUTO SETUP again to re-

calibrate your system.

• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer

than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your

subwoofer.

• In the EQUALIZING results, different values may be set for the

same band to provide finer adjustments.

If you selected “RELOAD” in step 6

The RESULT:EXIT display appears.

You can display each result by pressing k once and pressing h

repeatedly before exiting. Pressing n returns to the

RESULT:EXIT display.

8 Press l / h to select “SET”, then press n to

exit.

Note

/ : Up/Down

</> : Back/Next

RESULT:WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;;;OK

/ : Up/Down

EQ;;;;;FRONT L

63Hz;;;-2.0dB

125Hz;;;-5.0dB

500Hz;;;;;;0dB

630Hz;;;;;;0dB

1.0kHz;;;;;;0dB

3.15kHz;;;+3.0dB

10.0kHz;;;+1.0dB

RESULT:EQUALIZI.

/ : Up/Down

</> : Back/Next

. FRONT L;;;;3.20m

CENTER;;;;;3.30m

FRONT R;;;;2.90m

PRES L;;;;;1.70m

PRES R;;;;;1.50m

RESULT:DISTANCE1

/ : Up/Down

</> : Back/Next

. FRONT L;;;+5.0dB

CENTER;;;;-4.5dB

FRONT R;;;+5.5dB

PRESENCE;;-3.0dB

RESULT:LEVEL 1

/ : Up/Down

</> : Back/Next

FRONT L;;;;;;LRG

RESULT:SIZE 1

Notes

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure

Before auto setup

During auto setup

Press l / h to display the detailed information about individual errors. Select “RETRY” to try auto setup procedure

again.

Error message Cause Remedy

Connect MIC!

Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug HP!

Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1:NO FRONT SP

Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not

detected.

• Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B.

• Check the front L/R speaker connections.

E-2:NO SURR.SP

A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.

E-3:NO PRES. SP

A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.

E-4:SBR->SBL

Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT

SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you

only have one surround back speaker.

E-5:NOISY

Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup procedure in a quiet environment.

• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners

(etc.) or move them away from the optimizer

microphone.

E-6:CHECK SURR.

Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

• Connect surround speakers when you use (a)

surround back speaker(s).

E-7:NO MIC

The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the auto setup procedure.

• Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

E-8:NO SIGNAL

The optimizer microphone does not detect test

tones.

• Check the microphone setting.

• Check the speaker connections and placement.

E-9:USER CANCEL

The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to

user activity.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again.

E-10:OTHER ERROR

An internal error occurred. • Perform the auto setup procedure again.

AUTO SETUP

After auto setup

Press l / h to display the detailed information about individual warnings.

• If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again.

• If warning W-1, W-4 or W-5 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.

• If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.

• If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Speaker polarity is not correct. This message

may appear depending on the speakers even

when the speakers are connected correctly.

• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity

(+ or –).

W-2:OVER 24m

(80ft)

The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

• Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.

W-3:LEVEL ERROR

The difference of volume level among speakers

is excessive. (No level correction is made.)

• Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers

are set in locations with similar conditions.

• Check the speaker connections.

• Use speakers of similar quality.

• Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.

W-4:SWFR PHASE

The phase polarity of the subwoofer is not

correct.

• Select the opposite phase on the subwoofer if the

subwoofer has a phase switch.

W-5:VOL ERROR

The result may not be correct because the

volume was changed during the auto setup

procedure.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not

change the volume during the auto setup procedure.

BASIC SETUP

PREPARATION

The basic system parameters are set automatically when

you run auto setup (page 26). Basic setup is useful if you

want to quickly setup your speakers or to manually adjust

some of the items set in auto setup.

If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise

adjustments, use the detailed parameters in SOUND MENU

(page 55) instead of BASIC MENU.

Altering any parameters in BASIC MENU will reset all

parameters in SOUND MENU.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

2 Press k / n repeatedly to select MANUAL

SETUP, then press l / h to enter the

selected category.

If k is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if

n is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected,

SET MENU will be closed. Press SET MENU to

open SET MENU again.

3 Press l / h to enter BASIC MENU.

4 When ROOM is selected, press l / h to

change the setting.

Select the size of the room you have installed your

speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are

defined as follows:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft

(4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m

)

M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft

(6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m

)

L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft

(7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m

)

[Other models]

S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m

M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m

L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m

5 Press n to select SWFR, then press l / h to

select:

YES

If you have a subwoofer in your system.

NONE If you do not have a subwoofer in your system.

6 Press n to select PRESENCE, then press

l / h to select:

YES

If you have presence speakers in your system.

NONE If you do not have presence speakers in your

system.

BASIC SETUP

Note

Using BASIC MENU

SET MENU

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

2-9

SET MENU

AMP

SOURCE

then



SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

. ;MANUAL SETUP

: Up/Down

: Enter

</>

ENTER

then

ENTER

BASIC MENU 1/2

.ROOM: S[ML

SWFR:[YESNONE

PRESENCE;;;;NONE

SPEAKERS;;;;7spk

BASIC SETUP

7 Press n to select SPEAKERS, then press

l / h to select the number of speakers

connected to the unit.

The choices vary as follows depending on the

PRESENCE setting:

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers

in SOUND MENU (see page 60).

8 After you have finished the settings, press n,

then press l / h to select:

SET To apply the changes.

CANCEL To cancel the setup.

If you select “SET”, you will hear a test tone from

each speaker.

9 Press n to select CHECK OK?, then press

l / h to select:

YES

To exit the setup if the test tones were

satisfactory.

NO To adjust each speaker level (see page 57).

Choices

PRESENCE setting

YES

NONE

——

Front L/R

——

Front L/R,

Center

Presence L/R,

Front L/R

Front L/R,

Surround L/R

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Center

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Surround L/R

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R,

Surround back

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R,

Surround back

L/R

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R,

Surround back

——

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R,

Surround back

L/R

——

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL R

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL RC

LL C R

SL SB

LL R

SL SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

.[SET CANCEL

ROOM SIZE=MEDIUM

1 BASIC MENU 2/2

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

. CHECK OK?;;;;YES

1 BASIC MENU 2/2

. FR

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

(when “NO” is selected)

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.

Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.

When bi-wiring, select both A and B.

4 Select the input source.

Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons

on the remote control) to select the input you desire.

The current input source name and input mode appear

in the front panel display and video monitor for a few

seconds.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the component.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

PLAYBACK

Basic operations

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

1 4

SET MENU

PURE DIRECT

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

MACROONOFF

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Front panel Remote control

SPEAKERS

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

INPUT

Front panel Remote control

DVD AUTO

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

VOLUME

LL R

Selected input source

Input mode

VOLUME

VOL

–

Remote control

Front panel

PLAYBACK

7 Select a sound field program if desired.

Use PROGRAM (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP,

then press one of the sound field program buttons

repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See

page 46 for details about sound field programs.

When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following

display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal

level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX

recommendation).

■ Front panel operation

Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Note

PROGRAM

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TY THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

AMP

SOURCE

Remote control

Front panel

DialNorm;;+4dB

Selecting sound field programs

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT M MODE

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

PROGRAM

(U.S.A. model)

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

HiFi DSP

VOLUME

LL R

JAZZ CLUB

Program name

PROGRAM

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Remote control operation

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of

the sound field program buttons repeatedly to

select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,

and not on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH

INPUT is selected.

■ To adjust the tone

You can adjust the bass/treble

balance for the front left/right and

center channels.

Press TONE CONTROL

repeatedly on the front panel to

select TREBLE or BASS.

Select TREBLE, then rotate

PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease the high-

frequency response.

Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease the low-frequency response.

To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL

repeatedly to select BYPASS.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the

surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and

center speakers.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 46) or

PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected, or when MULTI CH

INPUT is selected.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective for headphones. Use HP

TONE CTRL to adjust bass/treble balance for the headphones

(page 59).

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the remote control.

The MUTE indicator flashes in the

front panel display.

To resume the audio output, press

MUTE again. (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator

disappears from the display.

You can adjust the muting level (see page 59).

■ To listen with headphones

(“SILENT CINEMA”)

“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT

CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect

headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to

CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When

activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in

the front panel display.

• This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI

CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

• “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a

2ch stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.

Notes

SET MENU

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

Sound field

program

buttons

AMP/SOURCE/TV

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

HiFi DSP

VOLUME

LL R

JAZZ CLUB

AMP

SOURCE

Program name

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

Additional operations

Notes

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MUTE

PLAYBACK

■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”

appears in the front panel display and video monitor.

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display

and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector

buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH

INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor.

■ Enjoying multi-channel software in

6.1/7.1 channel surround

If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use

this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-

channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby

Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.

Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD.

SUR on the remote control to switch between 5.1-

and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.

To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly

when PLIIxMovie (etc.) is displayed.

AUTO (AUTO)

When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is

input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing

back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.

If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in

the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/

7.1 channels.

Decoders (select with l / h)

You can select from the following modes depending on the

format of the software you are playing.

PLIIxMovie

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.

PLIIxMusic

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.

EX/ES

For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels

using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the

DTS-ES decoder.

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

OFF (OFF)

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1

channels.

When SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see

page 56), the surround back channel will output from the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these

kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PLIIxMovie,

PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD. SUR is

pressed in the following cases:

– When SURR L/R SP or SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE”

(see page 56).

– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is

being played.

– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R

channel signals.

– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– When 2ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.

• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be

reset to AUTO.

• When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, this

unit decodes the DTS 96/24 signals using DTS-ES Matrix

decoder.

• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R

SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56).

• “PLIIxMovie” cannot be selected when SURR B L/R SP is set

to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 56).

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

EXTD. SUR

ENT.

Notes

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multiple channels.

Press STANDARD on the remote control to select

the decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending on the

type of software you are playing and your personal

preference.

PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround

sources

PRO LOGIC IIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software.

DTS Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

DTS Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or

Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 85).

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP

is set to “NONE” (see page 56).

■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound

with PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP

processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry,

allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity

from analog and PCM sources.

Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct.

The button lights up and the front panel display

automatically goes out.

The front panel display switches on momentarily when an

operation is performed.

To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.

The indicator around the front panel button goes out and

the previous settings are restored.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

this mode.

• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will

be heard.)

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL (page 35) and SET MENU (page 53)

settings are not effective.

• The following operations are not possible during PURE

DIRECT operation:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the OSD

– adjusting SET MENU parameters

– all video functions (video conversion etc.)

• PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is

set to the standby mode.

Note

STANDARD

Notes

PURE DIRECT

Front panel Remote control

PLAYBACK

■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound

with Direct Stereo

Direct Stereo bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP

processors, allowing you to enjoy high fidelity sound from

2-channel PCM and analog sources.

This operation is recommended for use when high fidelity stereo

sound is desired with playback of a video source. Otherwise,

PURE DIRECT is recommended for the highest possible sound

fidelity (see page 37).

Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO repeatedly)

to select DIRECT STEREO.

The front panel display automatically dims.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

this mode.

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,

this unit automatically selects an analog signal input. (When

DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.)

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL (page 35) and SET MENU (page 53)

settings are not effective.

■ Night listening modes

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the

type of material you are playing.

Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to

select cinema or music.

When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in

the front panel display lights up.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources

to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.

Press l / h to adjust the effect level while

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.

This adjusts the level of compression.

• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.

• Select “MID” for standard compression.

• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.

NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored

independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT,

MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even

though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is

selected).

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and surround sound settings you use.

Notes

Direct Stereo

Front panel

PROGRAM

Remote control

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

Notes

Remote control

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multi-

channel sources.

Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the

remote control) to select 2ch Stereo.

You can use a subwoofer with this program when “SWFR” or

“BOTH” is selected in LFE/BASS OUT.

■ Listening to unprocessed input signals

In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are

output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels without any additional effect processing.

Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT”

disappears from the display when you want to turn the

sound effect back on.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.

If you set SURR L/R SP to “NONE”, Virtual CINEMA

DSP activates automatically whenever you select a

CINEMA DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when SURR L/R

SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56) in the following cases:

– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

■ Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine images from a video source with sound

from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery

from the video source on the video monitor.

Use the input selector buttons to select a video

source, then select an audio source.

If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press MULTI CH INPUT.

Note

2ch Stereo

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

Front panel

PROGRAM

Remote control

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

Front panel Remote control

Note

TUNERPHONO

AUX

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

PLAYBACK

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the

following to select the type of input signal you want to

use.

1 Select the input source.

2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.

In most cases, use AUTO.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

1) Digital signals

2) Analog signals

DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in

DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no

sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the

decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound

field program.

• You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the

power is turned on (see page 61).

• DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD

encoded in DTS.

If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

■ Displaying information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1 Select the input source.

2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

STRAIGHT/EFFECT so that “STRAIGHT”

appears in the display.

3 Press k / n to display the following

information about the input signal.

(Format) Signal format display. When the unit

cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

in Number of source channels in the input

signal. For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2

surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/LFE”.

fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is

unable to detect the sampling

frequency “Unknown” appears.

rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to

detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.

flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby

Digital signals that cue this unit to

automatically switch decoders.

The display shows “3/2/LFE” even when you play DTS-ES

Discrete 6.1 sources that include 3 surround channels.

Selecting input modes

Note

INPUT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

INPUT MODE

DVD AUTO

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

VOLUME

LL R

TRANSMIT

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

Front panel Remote control

Input mode

Note

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

AMP

SOURCE

then

ENTER

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input

source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l

to tune into a lower frequency.

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown in the front panel display.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an

FM station will automatically change the reception mode

to monaural to increase the signal quality.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 as described in

“Automatic tuning”.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this

unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.

Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

TUNING

Automatic and manual tuning

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

3324

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Lights up

PRESET

TUNING

EDIT

A~~AM~1440 kHz

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD T

AUTO

PRESET/

TUNING

A~~AM~1530 kHz

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD T

TUNE

AUTO

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Disappears

PRESET

TUNING

EDIT

A~~AM~1440 kHz

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD T

PRESET/

TUNING

■ Automatically presetting FM stations

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through

E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

presetting starts from the frequency currently

displayed and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting

stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Presetting stations

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

321

(U.S.A. model)

FM/AM

TUNING

MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Lights up

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

A1:FM 87.5 MHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

AUTO

MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations

in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually.

1 Tune into a station.

See page 41 for tuning instructions.

When tuned into a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A through E) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears in the front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 through 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other

stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

3 2,5

(U.S.A. model)

A :AM 630 kHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

VOLUME

LL R

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

A/B/C/D/E

C :AM 630 kHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

Notes

PRESET/

TUNING

C3:AM 630 kHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

C3:AM 630 kHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

VOLUME

LL R

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

TUNING

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

When performing this operation with the remote

control, first press TUNER to set the remote to

tuner mode.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station

group.

The preset group letter appears in the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/–

on the remote control) to select a preset

station number (1 through 8).

The preset group and number appear in the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the TUNED indicator lights up.

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” by using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Selecting preset stations

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

A/B/C/D/E

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

(U.S.A. model)

A/B/C/D/E

TV INPUT

Front panel Remote control

PRESET/

TUNING

–

PRESET

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNE

TUNED

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

Front panel

Remote control

Exchanging preset stations

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

1,3

2,4

(U.S.A. model)

PRESET

TUNING

EDIT

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

TUNED

MEMORY

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

PRESET

TUNING

EDIT

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

VOLUME

LL R

EDIT E1-A5

RECORDING

BASIC

OPERATION

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for those components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Always do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, SPEAKER

LEVEL (page 57) and programs does not affect recorded

material.

• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal to your VCR.

• Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not

output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.

Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are

not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your

source component is connected to provide only digital (or

analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

■ Special considerations when recording

DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player

is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation

instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will

be output from the player.

RECORDING

VOLUME

VIDEO AUXSILENT

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MULTI CH

INPUT

INPUT MODE

PRESET

TUNING

PHONES

A/B/C/D/E

S VIDEO

MEMORY

FM/AM

EDIT

PRESET

/TUNING

MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING

MODE

VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR

STANDBY

A B

MIC

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

EON PTY SEEK

MODE START

RDS MODE

/FREQ

TUNER

PURE DIRECT

YPAO

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

Notes

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to

AUTO (see page 40) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.

• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Notes

For movie/video sources

Program Features Sources

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel

sources as is.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC VIDEO

This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling that you

are at an actual jazz or rock concert.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Game

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

TV THEATER:

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence

sound field.

TV THEATER:

Variety/Sports

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the

sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching

various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

MOVIE THEATER:

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm

movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the

sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER:

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the

latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space

amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

MOVIE THEATER:

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of

the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to

that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained

as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER:

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multi-

channel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence

sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,

restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.

THX:

THX Cinema

THX processing for any multi-channel source. 2-channel sources are decoded by the PRO

LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II, PRO LOGIC IIx or DTS Neo: 6 decoder before THX processing.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

THX:

THX Surr. EX

THX processing for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital EX sources. This program is available

only when surround back L/R speakers are connected to this unit and when the input source

contains surround back channel signals.

MULTI

THX:

dts ES + THX

THX processing for DTS-ES sources.

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.

q D+PLIIxMovie:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

q D+PLIIxMovie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital

sources.

DTS:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources.

DTS:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS 96/24:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.

DTS+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS

sources.

DTS ES Disc6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Disc6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

DTS 96/24 ES:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

Program Features Sources

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

You can select either Pro Logic IIx or

Pro Logic II

processing using the

PLII/PLIIx

parameter on page 85.

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

2-CH

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.

DTS:

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

Program Features Sources

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

You can select either Pro Logic IIx or

Pro Logic II

processing using the

PLII/PLIIx

parameter on page 85.

For music sources

Program Features Sources

CONCERT HALL

HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.

Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,

rich sound.

MULTI

2-CH

JAZZ CLUB

HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous

New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering

a real and vibrant sound.

ROCK CONCERT

HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this

program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock venue. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-

left of the hall.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the

heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a

high-energy, “immediate” sound.

q D+PLIIxMusic:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

MULTI

q D+PLIIxMusic:

SUR. ENHANCED

DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

2 (left and right) channel playback.

2-CH

STEREO:

Direct Stereo

Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing.

STEREO:

7ch Stereo

Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.

DTS:

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

You can display this unit’s operating information on a

video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound

field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much

easier to see the available options and parameters than it is

by reading this information in the front panel display.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the

OSD mode.

The OSD mode changes in the

following order: full display, short

display, and display off.

Full display

Always shows the sound field program parameter

settings as well as the contents of the front panel

display.

Short display

Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display

at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this

unit.

Display off

Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are

displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET

MENU or the test tone feature, even if the OSD mode

is set to “Display off”.

• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will

not be recorded.

• When the component video signals are input, short display is

not output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a

video source is not being reproduced (or the source component

is turned off) by using DISPLAY SET (see page 62).

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S).

■ Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to

set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front

panel display changes as shown

below. The SLEEP indicator flashes

while switching the amount of time for

the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound

field program.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Selecting the OSD mode

Notes

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

P08

Sci-Fi

.DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB

P.INITDLY;;16ms

P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0



S.INITDLY;;20ms

S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0

P08MOVIE THEATER

Sci-Fi

Full display Short display

Using the sleep timer

TRANSMIT

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

SLEEP

SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP 90 min.

SLEEP 60 min.SLEEP 30 min.SLEEP OFF

SLEEP 120min

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

VOLUME

LL R

CONCERT HALL

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

SLEEP

VOLUME

LL R

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in

the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the

SLEEP indicator goes off.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front

panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

Please note that this operation will override the level

adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26),

“Speaker level” (page 57) and “Using the test tone”

(page 52).

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker you want to adjust.

FRONT L Front left speaker level

CENTER Center speaker level

FRONT R Front right speaker level

SUR.R Surround right speaker level

SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker level

SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker level

SUR.L Surround left speaker level

SWFR Subwoofer level

PRES Presence speaker level

Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by

pressing k / n.

3 Press l / h to adjust the speaker output

level.

The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

SLEEP

Manually adjusting speaker levels

SET MENU

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your

speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override

the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26),

“Speaker level” (page 57) and “Manually adjusting

speaker levels” (page 51). Use the test tone to set speaker

levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical

when heard from your listening position.

You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to

the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES

jack.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Press TEST.

The unit outputs a test tone.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select the speaker

you want to adjust.

TEST LEFT Front left speaker

TEST CENTER Center speaker

TEST RIGHT Front right speaker

TEST SUR. R Surround right speaker

TEST SUR. B. R Surround back right speaker

TEST SUR. B. L Surround back left speaker

TEST SUR. L Surround left speaker

TEST SUBWOOFER Subwoofer

4 Press l / h to adjust speaker volumes.

5 Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

If PRESENCE SP in SPEAKER SET is set to “YES”

(see page 56), proceed to step 6 to adjust the presence

speaker volumes.

If PRESENCE SP in SPEAKER SET is set to

“NONE”, the test tone stops.

6 Press k / n repeatedly to select the

speaker(s) you want to output the test tone.

TEST FRONT Front speakers

TEST PRESENCE Presence speakers

TEST PRES L Presence left speaker

TEST PRES R Presence right speaker

7 Press l / h to adjust the presence speaker

volumes.

8 Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

The test tone stops.

• If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point

upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the

meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each

speaker to 75 dB.

• Before outputting the test tone, we recommend that you set the

output volume to 0 dB.

Using the test tone

Note

SET MENU

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

3,6

2,5,8

4,7

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ AUTO SETUP

Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26).

■ MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings.

BASIC MENU

Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 31).

SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for

video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 26). You can use SOUND

MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first.

INPUT MENU

Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode, rename your inputs, or specify external input settings.

SET MENU

Item Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over

frequency.

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

D)GRAPHIC EQ

Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.

E)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

G)LOW FRQ. TEST

Matches the subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers.

H)HP TONE CTRL

Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones.

I)AUDIO SET

Customizes overall audio settings of this unit.

J)PR/SBch SELECT

Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are

connected to this unit.

Item Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT MODE

Selects the initial input mode of the source.

C)INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the inputs.

D)MULTI CH INPUT

Sets the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels for the

source component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

SET MENU

OPTION MENU

Use to adjust the optional system settings.

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only)

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit

is in either cinema or music night listening mode.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press

SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

2 Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP or

MANUAL SETUP, then press l / h to enter

the selected category.

If k is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if n is

pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU

will be closed. Press SET MENU to open SET MENU

again.

3 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu,

then press l / h to enter the menu item.

Repeat this operation to navigate to and enter the

setup mode of the item you want to adjust.

Item Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the settings of the OSD and the front panel display and converts video signals.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.

C)PARAM. INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

D)SP IMP. SET

Selects the impedance of your speakers.

E)ZONE SET

Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

F)ZONE2 SET

Selects the Zone 2 mode.

G)ZONE3 SET

Selects the Zone 3 mode.

Using SET MENU

Note

SET MENU

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

THX SURROUND SUR. BACK

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

2,3,5

2,3,4

Note

SET MENU

AMP

SOURCE

then



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

: Up/Down

: Enter

</>

ENTER

then

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press l / h repeatedly to change the setting

of the item you want to adjust.

5 To exit, press k / n repeatedly until the menu

disappears or just press one of the sound

field program group buttons.

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate

for video signal processing delays when using LCD

monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND parameters

are set automatically when you run auto setup (see

page 26).

■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Set any THX speakers to SMALL (SML).

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” if you do not have a center speaker.

The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the

front left and right speakers.

• Select “SML” if you have a small center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center

channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.

• Select “LRG” if you have a large center speaker. The

unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal

to the center speaker.

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

• Select “SMALL” if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.

• Select “LARGE” if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

ENTER

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TY THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

Using SOUND MENU

Note

. A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)GRAPHICEQ



: Up/Down

: Enter

</>

2 SOUND

MENU 1/3

NONE [SML LRG

CENTER SP

[SMALL LARGE

FRONT SP

SET MENU

Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select “NONE” if you do not have surround speakers.

This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 39) and automatically set the surround

back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP) to “NONE”.

• Select “SML” if you have small surround left and right

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/

BASS OUT.

• Select “LRG” if you have large surround left and right

speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the

surround speakers. The entire range of the surround

channel signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

Surround back speakers SURR B L/R SP

Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE

• Select “LRGx2” if you have 2 large surround back

speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back

speakers.

• Select “LRGx1” if you have a large surround back

speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the left surround back

speaker.

• Select “SMLx2” if you have 2 small surround back

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channels are directed to the speakers selected in

LFE/BASS OUT.

• Select “SMLx1” if you have a small surround back

speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channel are directed to the speakers selected in

LFE/BASS OUT, and the rest of the frequency signals

are directed to the left surround back speaker.

• Select “NONE” if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

If you select “LRGx1” or “SMLx1”, connect the speaker to the

left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Presence speakers PRESENCE SP

Choices: NONE, YES

• Select “YES” if you have presence speakers.

• Select “NONE” if you do not have presence speakers.

LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers

according to the characteristics of your system. This

setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS

sources.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRNT, BOTH

THX recommendation: SWFR

• Select “SWFR” if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.

• Select “FRNT” if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front speakers according to the speaker settings

(even if you have previously set front speakers to

SML).

• Select “BOTH” if you connect a subwoofer and you

want to output low-frequency signals from front

channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer.

LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels

are also directed to the subwoofer according to the

speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce low-

frequency signals using the subwoofer when playing

back sources such as CDs.

Note

NONE [SML LRG

SURR L/R SP

SMLx1 [SMLx2

SURR B L/R SP

[NONE YES

PRESENCE SP

[SWFR FRNT BOTH

LFE/BASS OUT

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz,

110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

THX recommendation: “80Hz”

■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left (or surround left) speaker and each

speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 55).

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

• FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right

speakers.

• C adjusts the balance of the front left and center

speakers.

• SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround

left speakers.

• SBL

adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround back left speakers.

• SBR

adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround back right speakers.

• SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround right speakers.

• SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and

subwoofer.

• PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence

speakers.

SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back

speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56).

If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point

upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the

meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each

speaker to 75 dB.

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sounds arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)

Other models: meters (m)

• Select “meters” to input speaker distances in meters.

• Select “feet” to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)

• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SB L

adjusts the distance of the surround back left

speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• SB R

adjusts the distance of the surround back right

speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial

setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

“SURR B” will be displayed if you selected only one surround

back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56).

FREQ;;;80Hz(THX)

CROSS OVER

. FR

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

. UNIT;;;;;;meters

FRONTL;;;;3.00m

FRONTR;;;;3.00m

CENTER;;;;;3.00m

: Up/Down

: Adjust

</>

C)SP

DISTANCE

SET MENU

■ Graphic equalizer D)GRAPHIC EQ

Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic

equalizer (GEQ).

Equalizer select EQ SELECT

Choices: PEQ, GEQ

• Select “PEQ” to use the equalizer adjusted in auto

setup.

• Select “GEQ” to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic

equalizer (see “Equalizer” below).

Equalizer

Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R

and surround back L/R speakers with that of the front L/R

speakers.

Choices: –6 to +6 (dB)

You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz,

1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz

■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-

frequency special effects which are only added to certain

scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 (dB)

Speaker SPEAKER

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not

be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack.

■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to

be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is

effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and

DTS signals.

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),

MAX (maximum)

Speaker SP

Select to adjust the speaker compression.

Headphone HP

Select to adjust the headphone compression.

• Select “MIN” if you regularly listen at low volume

levels.

• Select “STD” for general use.

• Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of

dynamic range.

Note

. EQ SELECT....PEQ

/ : Up/Down

</> : Select

D) GRAPHIC EQ

. CHANNEL;;FRONT L

63Hz 0dB

160Hz 0dB

400Hz 0dB

1kHz 0dB

2.5kHz 0dB

6.3kHz 0dB

16kHz 0dB

D)GRAPHIC

. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

/ : Up/Down

</> : Adjust

E)LFE

LEVEL

. SP: MIN STD[MAX

HP: MIN STD[MAX

/ : Up/Down

</> : Select

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Low frequency test G)LOW FRQ. TEST

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer

so it matches your other speakers.

1 Press l / h to set TEST TONE to ON, and

adjust the volume with VOL –/+ so you can

hear the tone.

Do not turn up the volume too high. If no test tone is

heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the

standby mode and make sure all the necessary

connections are correct.

The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise

centered on a specified frequency by the band pass

filter, as well as a wide-band noise.

2 Press n to go to OUTPUT and press l / h to

select the speaker you want to compare with

the subwoofer.

Choices: FRONT L/R, FRONT L, CENTER,

FRONT R, SUR.R, SBR

, SBL

, SUR.L, SWFR,

PRESENCE

* “SB” will be displayed if you selected only one surround

back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56).

3 Press n to go to FRQ and press l / h to

select the frequency you want to use.

Choices: 35 to 250 (Hz), WIDE

Initial: 88 Hz

4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the

controls on the subwoofer so it matches that

of the speaker you are comparing it to.

You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer

level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of

your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially

affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer

polarity and other conditions.

■ Headphone tone control H)HP TONE CTRL

Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your

headphones.

Choices: –6 to +6 (dB)

• Use BASS to adjust the headphone bass level.

• Use TRBL to adjust the headphone treble level.

■ Audio set I)AUDIO SET

Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings.

Mute MUTE

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

output volume.

Choices: MUTE, –20 dB

• Select “MUTE” to completely halt all output of sound.

• Select “–20 dB” to reduce the current volume by 20

dB.

Audio Delay AUDIO DELAY

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)

Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT

Use to turn on/off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see

page 85). This parameter adjusts the height of the front

and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by

assigning some of the front and center channel elements to

the presence speakers.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect.

• Select “OFF” to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect.

DIALG.LIFT appears only when PRESENCE is set to “YES”

(see page 31).

. TEST TONE;;;;OFF

OUTPUT;FRONT L/R

FRQ;;;;;;;;;88Hz

G)LOW FRQ.TEST

Note

. BASS

TRBL

0dB

/ : Up/Down

</> : Adjust

H)HP TONE

CTRL

/ : Exit

</> : Select

. AUDIO MUTE;;MUTE

AUDIO DELAY;;0ms

DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF

I)AUDIO SET

SET MENU

■ Presence/surround back channel select

J)PR/SBch SELECT

Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound

simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker

set when playing sources that contain surround back

channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field

programs.

Choices: PRch, SBch

• Select “PRch” to use presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channel will be output from

surround speakers.

• Select “SBch” to use surround back speakers when a

surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA

DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output

from front speakers.

Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode

or rename your inputs.

■ Input/output assignment

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your

needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the

respective jacks and effectively connect more components.

Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using INPUT on the front

panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.

The default settings are displayed with parentheses on the OSD.

CMPNT-V IN for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT

jacks [A] and [B]

Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT,

DTV, CD-R

OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1)

and (2)

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX,

DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD

/ : Exit

</> : Select

PRch [SBch

J)PR/SBch SELECT

Using INPUT MENU

Note

. A)I/OASSIGNMENT

B)INPUTMODE

C)INPUTRENAME

D)MULTI CH INPUT

: Up/Down

: Enter

</>

3 INPUT

. [A];;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[B];;;;; DTV

(DTV)

CMPNT-V

INPUT

. (1);;;;;MD/TAPE

(MD/TAPE )

(2);;;;; CD-R

(CD-R)

OPTICAL

OUT

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3), (4), (5)

and (6)

Choices: CD, PHONO, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT,

DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R

COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7), (8) and

(9)

Choices: CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1,

CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on

this unit (see page 40 for details about the input mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select “AUTO” to allow this unit to automatically

detect the type of input signal and select the

appropriate input mode.

• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select

the last input mode used for that source.

The last setting for the EXTD. SUR button will not be recalled,

even when “LAST” is selected.

■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the

OSD and front panel display.

1 Press an input selector button to select the

input you want to change the name of.

2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

3 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

4 Press k / n to select the character you want

to use and l / h to move to the next one.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

•Press n to change the character in the following

order, or press k to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, space, 0 to 9, space, a to z, space, #, *, +,

etc.

5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each

input.

6 Press h repeatedly to exit from INPUT

RENAME.

Notes

Note

. (3);;;;; CD

(CD)

(4);;;;; DVD

(DVD )

(5);;;;; DTV

(DTV )

OPTICAL

. (7);;;;; CD

(CD)

(8);;;;; DVD

(DVD )

(9);;;;;DVR/VCR2

(DVR/VCR2)

COAXIAL

/ : Exit

</> : Select

[AUTO LAST

B)INPUT MODE

</> : Position

/ : Character

DVD -> DVD

C)INPUT RENAME

SET MENU

■ Multi Channel Input D)MULTI CH INPUT

Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input

into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a

source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an

external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the

additional front signals.

6ch/8ch

This setting is used to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder.

Choices: 6ch

, 8ch

If ZONE2 AMP (page 64) is set to “ON”, no sound is output

from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this

case select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external decoder

to 6 channels.

FRNT

If you selected “8ch”, you can select analog audio jacks to

which front signals from an external decoder will be input.

Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, V-AUX

CENTER

Use to select where the signals input to the CENTER jack

will be output.

Choices: CENTER, FRONT

• Select “CENTER” to output the signals from the center

speaker.

• Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front

left and right speakers.

SWFR

Use to select where the signals input to the

SUBWOOFER jack will be output.

Choices: SWFR, FRONT

• Select “SWFR” to output the signals from the

subwoofer.

• Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front

left and right speakers.

SL/SR

Use to select where the signals input to the SURROUND

jacks will be output.

Choices: SL/SR, FRONT

• Select “SL/SR” to output the signals from the surround

speakers.

• Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front

left and right speakers.

■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

•Press h to lower the position of the OSD.

•Press l to raise the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Selecting “AUTO” for the on-screen display setting

displays a gray background when there’s no video signal

input.

If “OFF” is selected, information can only be displayed on

the screen when a video signal is being input

Choices: AUTO, OFF

If GRAY BACK is set to “OFF”, information cannot be displayed

when only component signals are being input.

Note

.[6CH 8CH

(FRNT/SB-> FRNT)

CENTER ->CENTER

SWFR -> SWFR

SL/SR -> SL/SR

( --- -> SB )

</> : Select

/ : Up/Down

D)MULTI CH INPUT

Using OPTION MENU

Note

. A)DISPLAYSET

B)MEMORYGUARD

C)PARAM.INI

D)SP IMP. SET

: Up/Down

: Enter

</>

OPTION

MENU1/2

/ : Up/Down

</> : Select

. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0

GRAY BACK;;;AUTO

V CONV.;;;;;;;ON

CMPNT OSD;;;;;ON

A)DISPLAY SET

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Video conversion V CONV.

Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite

(VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals.

This allows you to output converted video signals from the

S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no

S-video or component signals are input. This feature also

converts S-video signals to component signals when no

component signals are input.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.

• Select “ON” to convert composite signals to S-video

and component signals, and to convert S-video signals

to component signals.

• Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (composite or S-video) between each component.

• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a

VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer

depending on your VCR.

Component OSD CMPNT OSD

Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when

using SET MENU, the test tone or the parameter

functions.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “ON” to output the OSD signals from

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• Select “OFF” if you do not want to output the OSD

signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

SET MENU functions even when “OFF” is selected.

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

Select “ON” to protect:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• All speaker levels

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

When MEMORY GUARD is set to “ON”, you cannot use the test

tone or select any other SET MENU items.

■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field

program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the

parameter values have been changed from their initial

settings.

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a

sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual

sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY

GUARD is set to ON.

■ Speaker impedance setting

D)SP IMP.SET

Use to select the impedance of your speakers.

Choices: 6ohms, 8ohms

Notes

Note

/ : Exit

</> : Select

[OFF ON

B)MEMORY GUARD

Notes

123*4

*5678

9*0

C)PARAM. INI

/ : Exit

</> : Select

Minimum 8ohms

D)SP IMP.SET

SET MENU

■ Zone set E)ZONE SET

Speakers B SP B

Use to specify the location of speakers connected the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: MAIN, ZONE B

• Select “MAIN” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main room.

• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is

turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

• If you select “ZONE B” and connect headphones to the

PHONES jack on the unit, the sound is output from both

headphones and SPEAKERS B.

• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

■ Zone 2 set F)ZONE2 SET

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models

only)

Output volume OUTPUT VOL

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.

Choices: VAR., FIX

• Select “VAR.” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume

simultaneously with VOL –/+ on the remote control.

• Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume

level to a standard line level.

Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP

Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select “OFF” if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if

you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external

amplifier connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT

jacks.

• Select “ON” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you

connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s

PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.

■ Zone 3 set G)ZONE3 SET

(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models

only)

Output volume OUTPUT VOL

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 3 OUT jacks.

Choices: VAR., FIX

• Select “VAR.” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUT volume

simultaneously with VOL –/+ on the remote control.

• Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 3 OUT volume level to a

standard line level.

Notes

/ : Exit

</> : Main

SP B;;;;;;MAIN

E)ZONE SET

/ : Up/Down

</> : Select

OUTPUT VOL;;VAR.

ZONE2 AMP....OFF

F)ZONE2 SET

/ : Exit

</> : Select

OUTPUT VOL;;VAR.

G)ZONE3 SET

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by

YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the

appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a Learn feature which allows the remote to acquire

functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the

AMP mode.

■ Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected

component appears in the display window.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

PRESET

The buttons inside

the dotted lines

control this unit in

any mode

(SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, INPUT

MODE, VOLUME

+/–, MUTE, PURE

DIRECT and

STRAIGHT/

EFFECT).

AMP/SOURCE/

Set to AMP to

operate this unit.

Set to SOURCE

to operate the

component

selected with an

input selector

button.

Set to TV to

operate the

television.

Display

window

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

THX SURROUND SUR. BACK

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

PRESET

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

CHP/INDEX

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

THX SURROUND SUR. BACK

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

AVTV

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

–

PRESET

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

NIGHT

AUDIO

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

POWER POWER

AVTV

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

–

PRESET

Component

control area

You can control up to 14

different components by

setting appropriate remote

control codes (see

page 76).

A/B buttons and the input

selector buttons switch the

function of the component

control area below.

Use the A/B buttons to

control other components

regardless of whether they

are connected to this unit.

Factory setting:

A...LD player

B...Tape deck

SELECT k/n switches

control to another

component without

changing the input source

on this unit.

Display

window

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Controlling optional components

(OPTN area)

OPTN is an additional component control area that can be

programmed with remote control functions independently

from any input source. This area is useful for

programming commands that are to be used only as a part

of a macro function or for components that do not have a

valid remote control code.

To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until

OPTN appears in the display window.

• You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 68

to program buttons operated within this component control

area.

• The OPTN area cannot be used when AMP1Z or NO is selected

in the amplifier library (see page 67).

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area.

The following table shows the default component

(Library: component category) and the remote control

code for each input area.

Remote Control Code Default Settings

Additional YAMAHA codes available are given in parentheses.

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In

this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

Notes

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Library

(Component

category)

Default YAMAHA

code

A LD 2200

B TAPE 2700, (2701)

PHONO TV –

TUNER TUNER

2600, (0203, 1203,

1358, 2601)

CD CD 2300, (2301)

MULTI CH

INPUT

DVD

2102, (0517, 0566,

0572, 2100, 2101)

V-AUX VCR –

CBL/SAT CABLE –

MD/TAPE MD 2500, (2501, 2502)

CD-R CD-R 2400

DTV TV –

VCR 1 VCR –

DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807

DVD DVD

2102, (0517, 0566,

0572, 2100, 2101)

Note

AMP

SOURCE

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to set up.

3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected

component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in

the display window.

If you want to setup for another component, press the input

selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component.

• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,

otherwise the learning process will start.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

If you want to change a library (component

category), press l / h. You can set a

different type of component.

Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD,

L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner),

L:AMP

, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite),

L:VCR

The amplifier library (L:AMP) code is preset to “AMP1”

(2000) in order to operate this unit. However, you can

switch by entering one of the following five codes if

necessary.

4 Press ENTER.

The four-digit code set for the selected component

appears in the display window.

“0000” appears in the display window if no code has been

set.

5 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-

digit remote control code for the component

you want to use.

For a complete list of available remote control codes,

refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at

the end of this manual.

6 Press ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

“NG” appears in the display window if the setting

was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

If you continuously want to set up another code for another

component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n

to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.

7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup

mode.

Notes

Function

Code

AMP1

To operate this unit.

2000

AMP1Z

To operate

ZONE 2 or ZONE 3

features. (U.S.A., Canada, U.K.,

Europe and Australia models

only)

2001

To operate other manufacturers’

receivers / amplifiers using this

unit’s remote control

2004

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

LEARN

Note

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TY THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

LEARN

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to

see if you can control your component. If you

can, the remote control code is correct.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more

than one button simultaneously.

• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes

for commercially available audio and video components

(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible

with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote

control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming

codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote

control supplied with the component.

• Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over

remote control code functions.

Use the Learn feature if you want to program functions

not included in the basic operations covered by remote

control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not

available. You can program any of the buttons available in

the component control area (see page 65). The buttons can

be programmed independently for each component.

This remote control transmits infrared beams. If the other remote

control also uses infrared beams, this remote control can learn

most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program

some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to

the operating instructions for the other remote control.)

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select a

source component.

3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm

(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control

on a flat surface so that their infrared

transmitters are aimed at each other.

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

+10

ENT.

MACROONOFF

TRANSMIT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

Programming codes from other

remote controls (Learn)

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

TRANSMIT

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.

“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control

code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

5 Press the button for which you want to

program the new function.

“LEARN” appears in the display window.

6 Press and hold the button you want to

program on the other remote control until

“OK” appears in the display window.

“NG” appears in the display window if learning was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.

• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5

and 6.

• If you continuously want to program another function for

another component, press the input selector button or

SELECT k/n to select the component, then repeat steps 3

through 6.

7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning

mode.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more

than one button simultaneously.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.

However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may

appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this

case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room

for further learning.

• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:

– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other

components are weak.

– When the distance between the two remote controls is too

great or too small.

– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each

other at the appropriate angle.

– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.

– When the function to be programmed is continuous or

uncommon.

Notes

LEARN

TRANSMIT

SET MENU

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDIO

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

TRANSMIT

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

Notes

LEARN

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can change the name that appears in the display

window on the remote control if you want to use a

different name than the factory preset. This is useful when

you have set the input selector to control a different

component.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to rename.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press RE-NAME again.

4 Press k / n to select and enter a character.

Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z,

1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash),

and space.

(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)

5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next

position.

6 Press ENTER to set the new name.

“OK” appears in the display window if renaming was

successful.

“NG” appears in the display window if renaming was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

If you continuously want to rename another component,

press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the

component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.

7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming

mode.

“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not

indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one

button simultaneously.

Changing source names in the

display window

Note

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

RE-NAME

ENTER

Note

ENTER

RE-NAME

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,

when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button

to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.

The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros

(see page 72).

You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC

OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For

details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)

Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD

recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that

component (see page 68) or set a remote control code (see page 66).

When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.

Using the Macro feature

Macro buttons First Second Third

—

——

—

——

—

(

—

(CD area) (

—

(MD/TAPE area) (

(CD-R area) (

—

(VCR 1 area) (

(DVR/VCR 2 area) (

(DVD area) (

POWER

SYSTEM

(CD area)

Press a macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order

STANDBY

POWER

SYSTEM

POWER

SYSTEM

PHONO

POWER

SYSTEM

PHONO

TUNER

(*3)

MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN

AUX

CBL/SAT

MD/TAPE

CD-R

DTV

VCR 1

DVR/VCR2

DVD

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

■ Macro operations

1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.

2 Press a macro button.

• When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO

ON/OFF to OFF.

• While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not

accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is

complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).

• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro

is operating until the macro operation is complete.

■ Programming macro operations

You can program your own macros and use the macro

feature to transmit several remote control commands in

sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote

control codes or perform learning operations before

programming the macro. We do not recommend

programming continuous operations such as volume

control in a macro.

• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is

programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again

when the programmed macro is cleared.

• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default

macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3 Press the macro button you want to use to

operate the macro.

The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the

selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear

alternately in the display window.

“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a

button other than a macro button.

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

TRANSMIT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

MACROMACRO ON/OFF

Macro buttons

Notes

Note

AMP

SOURCE

MACRO

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press the buttons for the functions you want

to include in the macro operation in

sequence.

You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you

have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote

control automatically exits the macro mode.

To change the selected source component, press SELECT k/n.

Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,

whereas SELECT k/n only changes the selected component

and corresponding component control area.

5 Press MACRO again when the operation

sequence you want to program is complete.

“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a

button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press

more than one button simultaneously.

You can clear all changes made in each function set, such

as learned functions, renamed source names and setup

remote control codes.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“CLEAR” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.

In this case, press CLEAR again.

3 Press k / n to select the clear mode.

L:DVD (L: name of a component)

Clears all learned functions in the respective

component control area. Press an input selector

button to select the component.

L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control

area.

L:ALL Clears all learned functions.

M:ALL Clears all programmed macros

RNAME Clears all renamed source names.

FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote

to the factory settings.

4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3

seconds.

“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing

was successful, “C:OK” appears in the display

window.

Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the

button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer

setting, if you have set remote control codes).

“L:ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to

complete.

Note

Memory back-up

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries,

set up the remote control code(s) and program any

acquired functions that may have been cleared.

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

MCR 1: DVD

Indicates the

number of macro

steps entered

Flashes alternately so you can

set the next step

MCR 2: AV POWER

MCR 3: h

Clearing function sets

Note

AMP

SOURCE

CLEAR

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

■ Clearing a learned function

You can clear the function learned for a certain button in

each control area.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.

2 Press an input selector button to select the

source component containing the function

you want to clear.

The selected component name appears in the display

window.

3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar

object.

“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.

“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.

• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for

more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote

control code setting mode.

• If you do not complete each of the following steps within

30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

Notes

CLEAR

Clearing individual functions

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

LEARN

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object, then press the button you

want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing

was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 4.

• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the

factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have

set remote control codes).

5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the learning mode.

6 Press LEARN again to exit.

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

■ Clearing a macro function

You can clear the function programmed for a certain

macro button.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.

2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

“MCR ?” appears in the display window.

If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30

seconds, the macro programming mode will be

automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.

3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen

or similar object, then press the macro

button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.

“C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing

was successful.

• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat

step 3.

• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts

to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you

have set remote control codes).

4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.

The remote control returns to the macro

programming mode.

5 Press MACRO again to exit.

• “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was

unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.

• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button

not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than

one button simultaneously.

Notes

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

Note

Notes

AMP

SOURCE

MACRO

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

REC

DISC SKIP

MACROONOFF

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use

this remote to control your other components. Note that some

buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use

the input selector buttons to select the component you want to

operate. The remote control automatically switches to the

appropriate control mode for that component.

This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.

These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control

code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.

These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.

These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only.

Controlling each component

DVD player/

DVD recorder

VCR

Cable TV/

Satellite tuner

TV LD player CD player

MD recorder/

CD recorder

Tape deck Tuner

1 AV P OWER

Power

VCR power

Power

2 TV POWER

TV power

Power

TV power

3 TV VOL +

TV volume +

Volume +

TV volume +

TV VOL –

TV volume –

Volume –

TV volume –

CH +

TV channel +

Channel +

Channel + Channel +

TV channel +

PRESET +

CH –

TV channel –

Channel –

Channel – Channel –

TV channel –

PRESET –

TV INPUT/

A/B/C/D/E

TV input

Input

TV input

Direction A/B

A/B/C/D/E

TV MUTE

TV mute

Mute

TV mute

4 TITLE

Title Title Title Title

5 MENU

Menu Menu Menu

6 ENTER

Menu enter Menu select Menu select

k Menu up Menu up Menu up

n Menu down Menu down Menu down

l Menu left Menu left Menu left

h Menu right Menu right Menu right

7 RETURN

Return Return Return Return

8 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons

Preset stations (1-8)

9 ll

backward

VCR search

backward

VCR search

backward

FREQ

hh Search forward Search forward

VCR search

backward

VCR search

backward

Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward

EON

b Skip backward

Chapter/Skip

backward

Skip backward Skip backward Direction back

PTY MODE

a Skip forward

Chapter/Skip

forward

Skip forward Skip forward

Direction

forward

PTY START

REC/

DISC SKIP

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder)

Rec

VCR rec

Disc skip Rec Rec

s Stop Stop

VCR stop

Stop Stop Stop Stop

e Pause Pause

VCR pause

Pause Pause Pause Pause

h Play Play

VCR play

Play Play Play Play

0 AUDIO

Audio Audio

A DISPLAY

Display Display Display Display Display Display

B ENTER

Title/Index Enter Enter/recall

Enter/

numeric button

Chapter/Time Index Index

TRANSMIT

SET MENU

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

PRESET

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

VOL

–

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

SOURCE

MACROONOFF

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit

to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control

this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.

You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:

• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.

• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second

and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).

• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.

• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with

your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.

• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not

need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.

■ System configuration and connection example

Using external amplifiers

To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, set ZONE2 AMP to “OFF” in SET MENU.

• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the

amplifier in the second/third room.

• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

(U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)

Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third

room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.

Zone 2/Zone 3 connections

Notes

OUT

CONTROL OUT

This unit

REMOTE OUT

AUDIO IN

MONITOR OUT

SP OUT

ZONE 2 REMOTE IN

ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT

ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT

ZONE 3 REMOTE IN

MAIN

ZONE 3

ZONE 2

Infrared emitter

CD player

(or other component)

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Amplifier

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Second room Third roomMain room

SYSTEM

This unit

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)

Using this unit’s internal amplifier

To use this unit’s internal amplifier, set ZONE2 AMP to ON in SET MENU (see page 64).

The supplied remote control can be used to control

Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and

control components located in the main room directly

from the second/third room regardless of the listening

condition in the main room.

■ To enable Zone mode on the remote

control

You will be able to switch the remote control mode from

one room to another, and use the input selector,

STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/

– to control the selected room.

1 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in

“Setting remote control codes” on page 66.

2 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”.

3 Press ENTER.

“2000” appears in the display window.

4 Enter the code number “2001”.

5 Press ENTER to set the number.

“OK” appears in the display window if setting was

successful.

6 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup.

The remote control will be able to operate this unit

from Zone 2 or Zone 3.

■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3

1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display

“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window.

2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or

Zone 3 power on.

3 Press an input selector button to select the

input source you want to listen to in the

second/third room.

The display window shows “2: name of selected

input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote

control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.

Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to

Zone 2/Zone 3.

–

PRESENCE/ ZONE 2

Second room

This unit

Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3

ENTER

LEARN

Note

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

01EN06_Advns_RXV1500U.fm Page 78 Wednesday, March 9, 2005 7:20 PM

ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone

3 by using the input selector, STANDBY,

SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/–

buttons.

VOLUME +/– can be used only when OUTPUT VOL is

set to VAR. in SET MENU (see page 64).

5 Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2/

Zone 3 mode.

• The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are

always the same.

• “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only

when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed.

■ Turning this unit to either on or standby

SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently

depending on the selected mode that appears on the

display window.

• When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you

can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby

individually.

• When System mode is selected, or when “AMP1” is

selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you

can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to on/

standby simultaneously.

“MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER

or STANDBY is pressed.

■ Special considerations for DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to

send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will

only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers).

Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need

to be made when playing DTS encoded discs.

For DVDs encoded with DTS

Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the

second/third room.

Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-

channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby

Digital soundtrack.

For CDs encoded in DTS

To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/

Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.

Notes

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

SET MENU

PURE DIRECT

LEVEL

TITLE

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

VOL

–

TV VOL

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

–

AMP

SOURCE

LCD display

SYSTEM POWER/

STANDBY

Normal mode

Name of component

Turns the main unit

on/standby

Zone 2 mode

“ZONE2” or “2:name

of component”

Turns Zone 2 to on/

standby

Zone 3 mode

“ZONE3” or “3:name

of component”

Turns Zone 3 to on/

standby

System mode

“SYSTM”

Turns everything (the

main unit, Zone 2,

Zone 3) on/standby

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live

instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of

the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these

reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,

and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are

two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to

make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.

Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial

settings, you can change some of the parameters to better

suit the input source or your listening room.

1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.

2 Turn on the video monitor and press ON

SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display

mode.

3 Select the sound field program you want to

adjust.

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

What is a sound field? Changing parameter settings

CLEAR

LEARN

RE–NAME

SET MENU

FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START

REC

DISC SKIP

EFFECT

TEST

RETURN

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

NIGHT

AUDI O

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

LEVEL

TITLE

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

TV MUTE TV INPUT

MUTE

MACROONOFF

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE

CD-R

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

VOL

–

POWER POWER POWER

SYSTEM

STANDBY

AVTV

SLEEP

INPUT MODE

–

TV VOL

–

AMP

SOURCE

4,5

AMP

SOURCE

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC TV THTR

MOVIE

STEREO HALL JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10

ENT.

5678

P04 ROCK CONCERT

ROOM SIZE;;;;1.0

LIVENESS;;;;;;;5

REV.TIME;;;;1.6s

REV.DELAY;;120ms

DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB

INIT.DLY;;;;15ms

Program No. Program name

Parameters Parameter values

Cursor

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

4 Press k / n to select the

parameters.

5 Press l / h to change

the parameter value.

When you set a parameter to a

value other than the factory

preset, an asterisk mark (*)

appears by the parameter name

on the video monitor.

6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to

change other program parameters.

• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one

OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,

press k / n.

• You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD

is set to “ON”. If you want to change the parameter values, set

MEMORY GUARD to “OFF” (see page 63).

■ Resetting parameters to the factory

values

To reset a certain parameter

Select the parameter you want to reset, then press l / h

repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter

name disappears from the video monitor.

To reset all parameters

Use PARAM.INI (see page 63).

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter values will return to the

factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter

value again.

ENTER

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ DSP LEVEL

Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect

level relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control range: –6 dB – +3 dB

■ INIT. DLY/P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay)

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting

the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the

farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.

Control range: 1

– 99 msec

■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the

surround sound field becomes.

Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between

the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the

reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from

one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.

Control range: 0.1 – 2.0

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Source Sound

Early

Reflections

Time Time Time

INIT. DLY

INIT. DLY INIT. DLY

Sound Source

Reflection Face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Time

Source Sound

Early

Reflections

Small value = 0.1

Large value = 2.0

Sound Source

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ LIVENESS

Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the

early reflections decay.

Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall

surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces

is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The

LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the

room.

Control range: 0 – 10

■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of

the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround

channels are used.

Control Range: 1 – 49 msec

■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.

Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0

■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.

Control Range: 0 – 10

■ SB INI. DLY (Surround back initial delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back

sound field.

Control Range: 1 – 49 msec

■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.

Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0

■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness)

Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.

Control Range: 0 – 10

Source Sound

Level

Dead

Live

Time

Time Time

Small Reflected

Sound

Large Reflected

Sound

Small value = 0

Large value = 10

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time)

Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to

decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an

extremely wide range.

Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter

the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems.

Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec

■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay)

Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning

of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you

feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.

Control Range: 0 – 250 msec

■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level)

Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.

Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.

Control Range: 0 – 100%

Reverberation

60 dB 60 dB 60 dB

Source Sound

REV.TIME

Sound Source

Short

Reverberation

Long

Reverberation

Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s

Early Reflections

(dB)

60 dB

Level

Source Sound

Reverberation

REV.TIMEREV.DELAY

Time

Source Sound

Level

REV. LEVEL

Time

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift)

Function: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front

and center channel elements to the presence speakers.

Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.

Choices: 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3.

For 7ch Stereo

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.

Control Range: 0 – 100%

■ CT LEVEL (Center level)

■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level)

■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level)

■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level)

■ PL LEVEL (Presence left level)

■ PR LEVEL (Presence right level)

For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music

■ PANORAMA

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.

■ DIMENSION

Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).

■ CENTER WIDTH

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the

center image towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only

from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.

For PRO LOGIC IIx Music, Movie and Game

■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx)

Function: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2-

channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources.

Choices: PLII, PLIIx

For DTS Neo:6 Music

■ C. IMAGE (Center image)

Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

Control range: 0 – 1.0

For THX Cinema

■ DEC (2ch Decoder Select)

Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema.

Choices: PRO LOGIC / PLII Movie / Neo:6 Cinema

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cord firmly.

—

The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

13–16

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use

it normally.

—

On-screen display

does not appear.

The setting for the on-screen display is set

to “DISPLAY OFF”.

Select the full or short display mode.

GRAY BACK in the SET MENU is set to

“OFF”, and no video signal is currently

being received.

Set GRAY BACK to “AUTO” to always show the

OSD.

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

18–21

The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.

—

The input mode is set to “DTS” or

“ANALOG”.

Set the input mode to “AUTO”.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,

MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons.

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.

The front speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

The input mode is set to “ANALOG”

while playing a source encoded with a

DTS signal.

Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”.

The signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being received from a source component

e.g.: a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

—

No picture The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Turn on the video conversion function.

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn this unit back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Incorrect balance settings in the SET

MENU.

Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings.

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on.

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program.

No sound from the

center speaker.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

CENTER SP in the SET MENU is set to

“NONE”.

Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.

One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for

7ch Stereo) has been selected.

Try another sound field program.

No sound from the

surround speakers.

The output level of the surround speakers

is set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround speakers.

SURR L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to

“NONE”.

Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and

right speakers.

A monaural or stereo source is being

played with STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound

fields.

—

No sound from the

surround back

speakers.

Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SBch SELECT.

SURR L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to

“NONE”.

If the surround left and right speakers are set to

“NONE”, surround back speakers are automatically

set to “NONE”. Select the appropriate setting for the

surround left and right speakers.

SURR B L/R SP in the SET MENU is set

to “NONE”.

Select “SMLx1”, “SMLx2”, “LRGx1” or “LRGx2”.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

LFE/BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set

to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being played.

Select “SWFR” or “BOTH”.

LFE/BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set

to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel

source is being played.

Select “BOTH”.

The source does not contain low bass

signals.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operations

instructions for your component.

—

The input mode is set to “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”.

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

—

No connection from the turntable to the

GND terminal.

Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the

GND terminal of this unit.

The volume level is

low while playing a

record.

The record is being played on a turntable

with an MC cartridge.

The turntable should be connected to this unit through

an MC-head amplifier.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

—

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to this

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

18–21

Some components cannot record Dolby

Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT jacks.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

18–21

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

MEMORY GUARD in the SET MENU is

set to “ON”.

Select “OFF”.

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and

then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

—

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Tuner

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

There is noise

interference from

digital or radio-

frequency equipment,

or this unit.

This unit is too close to the digital or

radio-frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

—

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

There is noise when

the OSD is displayed.

The OSD may be disturbed when

displaying OSD through component video

connections.

Select OFF in CMPNT OSD.

This unit suddenly

turns into the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and

then turn it back on.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

—

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for best reception.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats and other electrical

equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

—

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.

—

TROUBLESHOOTING

■ Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

Refer to

page

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.

When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.

When operating the component selected by the input

selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.

When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO

area, set it to the TV position.

—

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly.

Try setting another code of the same manufacturer.

Even if the remote control code is

correctly set, there are some models that

do not respond to the remote control.

Program the necessary functions independently into

the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.

The remote control

does not “learn” new

functions.

The batteries of this remote control and/or

the other remote control are too weak.

Replace the batteries.

The distance between the two remote

controls is too much or too little.

Place the remote controls at the proper distance.

The signal coding or modulation of the

other remote control is not compatible

with this remote control.

Learning is not possible.

—

Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for

the new functions.

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. It

provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels

(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.

An additional channel especially for bass effects, called

LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the

system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1

channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround

speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and

surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby

Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to

minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range

channels and the precise sound orientation generated

using digital sound processing provide listeners with a

previously unheard of excitement and realism.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using

a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital

EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with

Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,

you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving

sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “fly-

around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.

This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2

front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2

surround left and right channels (instead of only 1

surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology).

Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel

sources in addition to the Movie mode.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling 6.1 or

7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-

channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a

Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/

24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-

motion video for music programs and motion picture

soundtracks on DVD-video.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,

left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus

an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-

channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that

enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround

back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by. It enables playback with the full-

range channels with higher separation comparable to

digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;

“Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema

mode” for movies.

GLOSSARY

Audio formats

GLOSSARY

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed

for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured

data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original

sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and

audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room

of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects without any surround speakers by using

virtual surround speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

Sound field programs

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering

studios.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ THX Cinema processing

THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies

established by the world-renowned film production

company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’

personal desire to make your experience of the film

soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home

theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director

intended.

Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres

called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back

in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions.

This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto

Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for

playback in a small home theatre environment.

THX engineers developed patented technologies to

accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre

environment into the home, correcting the tonal and

spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX

indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in

Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).

Adaptive decorrelation

In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers

help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but

in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This

can make the surround speakers sound like headphones

that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround

sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you

move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive

decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time

and phase relationship with respect to the other surround

channel. This expands the listening position and creates –

with only two speakers – the same spacious surround

experience as in a movie theatre.

Re-equalization

The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively

bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment

in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be

played back in large movie theatres using very different

professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the

correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a

small home environment.

Timbre matching

The human ear changes our perception of sound

depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a

movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so

that the surround information is all around you. In a home

theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of

your head. The timbre matching feature filters the

information going to the surround speakers so that they

more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound

coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless

panning between the front and surround speakers.

Audio information

GLOSSARY

■ THX Select

Before any home theatre component can be THX Select

certified, it must incorporate pass a rigorous series of

quality and performance tests. Only then can a product

feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that

the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you

superb performance for many years to come. THX Select

requirements cover every aspect of the product including

power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and

operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the

digital and analog domain.

■ THX Surround EX

THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint

development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd.

In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been

encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are

able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added

during the mixing of the program. This channel, called

Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in

addition to the currently available front left, front center,

front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer

channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity

for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings

more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization

than ever before.

Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital

Surround EX technology, when released into the home

consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the

packaging. A list of movies created using this technology

can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A

list of available DVD software titles encoded with this

technology can be found at www.thx.com.

Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX

Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode,

faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.

This product may also engage the THX Surround EX

mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is

not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the

information delivered to the Surround Back channel will

be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing

depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of

the individual listener.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB

and P

R signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in order

to use the component signal for output.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

Video signal information

SPECIFICATIONS

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 120 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[Australia, China, Korea, Asia and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................170 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General

models]

8/6/4/2 Ω .........................................................155/195/250/330 W

• DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................170 W

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................125 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Front L/R ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02%

CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R

[U.K., Europe and Australia models] ....................................81 dB

[Other models].......................................................................86 dB

CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off................................ 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency..................................................350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency........................................... 3.5 kHz

• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level/Output Impedance

REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω

SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω

ZONE 2 OUTPUT

[U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe

and Australia models]............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

ZONE 3 OUTPUT

[U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe

and Australia models]............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ............................................................PAL/NTSC

• Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 60 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-video................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB

• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz

[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz

[General model] ............... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Asia model] ................................... AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA

[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W

• Standby Power Consumption

[Asia and General models] (AC 240 V/50 Hz) ......... 0.8 W or less

[Other models] ......................................................... 0.5 W or less

•AC Outlets

[U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)

[U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)

[China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 433.5 mm

(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”)

• Weight .................................................................. 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs)

SPECIFICATIONS

LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES

AMPLIFIER

AMSTRAD 0105

ARCAM 0296

AUDIOLAB 0296

CARVER 0296

GE 0105

GENEXXA 0422

GRUNDIG 0296

HARMAN/KARDON

0919

JVC 0358

LEFT COAST 0919

LINN 0296

MAGNAVOX 0296

MARANTZ 0296, 0919

MICROMEGA 0296

MYRYAD 0296

OPTIMUS 0422

PANASONIC 0335

PHILIPS 0296, 0919

PIONEER 0040

POLK AUDIO 0296, 0919

REALISTIC 0422

REVOX 0296

SONY 0247

SOUNDESIGN 0105

TECHNICS 0335

THORENS 0296

VICTOR 0358

WARDS 0040, 0105

YAMAHA 0381

CABLE

ABC 0030, 0035

AMERICAST 0926

BELL SOUTH 0926

BIRMINGHAM CABLE

COMMUNICATIONS

0303

BRITISH TELECOM 0030

CABLE & WIRELESS

1095

DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

DIRECTOR 0503

FILMNET 0470

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0030, 0303, 0503,

0837,

GOLDSTAR 0171

HAMLIN 0036, 0300

JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,

0837

LG 0171

MNET 0470

MEMOREX 0027

MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,

1133

NTL 1095

NOOS 0844

ONO 1095

PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX

0030

PACE 0264, 1087, 1095

PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134

PARAGON 0027

PHILIPS 0332, 0344

PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,

1904

PULSAR 0027

QUASAR 0027

REGAL 0300, 0306

RUNCO 0027

SAGEM 0844

SAMSUNG 0027, 0171

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

0035, 0504, 0904,

1904

SONY 1033

STARCOM 0030

SUPERCABLE 0303

TS 0030

TELE+1 0470

TELEWEST 1095

TORX 0030

TOSHIBA 0027

TRANS PX 0303

UNITED CABLE 0030

ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926

CD PLAYER

AIWA 0184

ARCAM 0184

AUDIO RESEARCH 0184

AUDIO TON 0184

AUDIOLAB 0184

AUDIOMECA 0184

CAIRN 0184

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS

0056

CARVER 0184, 0206

CYRUS 0184

DKK 0027

DMX ELECTRONICS

0184

DENON 0900

DYNAMIC BASS 0206

EMERSON 0332

FISHER 0206

GENEXXA 0059, 0332

GOODMANS 0332

GRUNDIG 0184

HARMAN/KARDON

0184, 0200

HITACHI 0059

JVC 0099

KENWOOD 0055, 0064

KRELL 0184

LXI 0332

LINN 0184

MCS 0056

MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332

MARANTZ 0056, 0184

MATSUI 0184

MEMOREX 0332

MERIDIAN 0184

MICROMEGA 0184

MIRO 0027

MISSION 0184

MYRYAD 0184

NAD 0027

NSM 0184

NAIM 0184

OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,

0206, 0332

PANASONIC 0056

PHILIPS 0184

PIONEER 0059, 0332

POLK AUDIO 0184

PROTON 0184

QED 0184

QUAD 0184

QUASAR 0056

RCA 0059, 0206, 0332

REALISTIC 0206

REVOX 0184

ROTEL 0184

SAE 0184

SANSUI 0184, 0332

SANYO 0206

SCOTT 0332

SEARS 0332

SHARP 0064

SIMAUDIO 0184

SONIC FRONTIERS 0184

SONY 0027

SYMPHONIC 0332

TAG MCLAREN 0184

TANDY 0059

TECHNICS 0056

THORENS 0184

THULE 0184

UNIVERSUM 0184

VICTOR 0099

WARDS 0184

YAMAHA 2300, 2301

CD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0653

MARANTZ 0653

PHILIPS 0653

YAMAHA 2400

DVD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS

0757

ALBA 0744

AMSTRAD 0740

APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,

0782, 0821, 0823,

0857, 1127

BLAUPINKT 0744

BLUE PARADE 0598

BUSH 0740

CENTREX 0699

CLATRONIC 0815

CYBERHOME 0741

DVD2000 0548

DAEWOO 0811, 0797

DANSAI 0797

DECCA 0797

DENON 0517

DIAMOND 0795

DIGITREX 0699

EMERSON 0618

ENTERPRISE 0618

FISHER 0697

GE 0549, 0744

GO VIDEO 0742

GOLDSTAR 0768

GRADIENTE 0678

GREENHILL 0744

GRUNDIG 0566

HITACHI 0600, 0691

HITEKER 0699

JVC 0585, 0650

KLH 0744

KENWOOD 0517, 0561

KOSS 0678

LG 0768

LIMIT 0795

MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702

MARANTZ 0566

MEMOREX 0858

MICO 0750

MICROSOFT 0549

MINTEK 0744

MITSUBISHI 0548

MUSTEK 0757

NESA 0744

ONKYO 0530

ORITRON 0678

PALSONIC 0699

PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389

PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,

0881

PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,

0659

POLK AUDIO 0566

PROSCAN 0549

QWESTAR 0678

RCA 0549, 0598, 0744

ROTEL 0650

SM ELECTRONIC 0757

SAMSUNG 0600

SANYO 0697

SHARP 0657

SHERWOOD 0797

SHINSONIC 0560

SLIM ART 0811

SONY 0560, 0891

SYLVANIA 0702

TATUNG 0797

TEAC 0598, 0744

TECHNICS 0517

THETA DIGITAL 0598

THOMSON 0549

TOSHIBA 0530

URBAN CONCEPTS 0530

XBOX 0549

YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,

2100, 2101, 2102

ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768

ZEUS 0811

DVD RECORDER

PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802

PHILIPS 2808

PIONEER 2804, 2805, 2806

TOSHIBA 2803

YAMAHA 2807

LD PLAYER

CARVER 0091

DENON 0086

MARANTZ 0091

MITSUBISHI 0086

NAD 0086

NAGSMI 0086

OPTIMUS 0086

PHILIPS 0091

PIONEER 0086

SALORA 0091

SONY 0228

TELEFUNKEN 0086

YAMAHA 2200

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0708

ONKYO 0895

SHARP 0888

SONY 0517

YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502

RECEIVER (TUNER)

ADC 0558

AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,

1432, 1668

ALCO 1417

ANAM 1636

APEX DIGITAL 1284

AUDIOLAB 1216

AUDIOTRONIC 1216

AUDIOVOX 1417

BOSE 1256

CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS

1397

CAPETRONIC 0558

CARVER 1116, 1216

CENTREX 1284

DENON 1387

FERGUSON 0558

FINE ARTS 1216

GRUNDIG 1216

HARMAN/KARDON

0137, 1331

INTEGRA 0162, 1325

JBL 0137, 1333

JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,

1522

KLH 1417, 1439

KENWOOD 1054, 1340

MCS 0066

MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,

1296,

MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,

1316

MICROMEGA 1216

MUSICMAGIC 1116

MYRYAD 1216

NAD 0347

NORCENT 1416

ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325

OPTIMUS 0558, 1050

PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,

1790

PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,

1295, 1296, 1310,

1316

PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,

1411

POLK AUDIO 1316

PROSCAN 1281

QUASAR 0066

RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,

1417, 1636,

SABA 0558

SANSUI 1116

SCHNEIDER 0558

SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,

1685, 1785

STEREOPHONICS 1050

SUNFIRE 1340

TEAC 1417

TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,

1545

TELEFUNKEN 0558

THOMSON 1281

THORENS 1216

UHER 0558

VENTURER 1417

VICTOR 0101

WARDS 0041, 0185

YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,

2600, 2601

SATELLITE TUNER

@SAT 1327

ABSAT 0150

ALBA 0482

ALPHASTAR 0799

AMSTRAD 0874

ASTON 0169, 1156

ASTRO 0200

ATSAT 1327

AVALON 0423

BLAUPUNKT 0200

BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING

0874, 1202

CANAL DIGITAL 0880

CANAL SATELLITE 0880

CANAL+ 0880

CHAPARRAL 0243

CITYCOM 1203

CONNEXIONS 0423

CROSSDIGITAL 1136

CYRUS 0227

D-BOX 0750, 1154

DMT 1102

DNT 0227, 0423

DAERYUNG 0423

DAEWOO 1323

DIGENIUS 0326

DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,

0666, 0751, 0776,

0846, 1103, 1136,

1169, 1776, 1883

DISH NETWORK SYSTEM

0802, 1032

DISHPRO 0802, 1032

DISTRATEL 0111

DREAM MULTIMEDIA

1264

ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,

0802, 0880, 0898,

1032, 1113

ENGEL 1044

EXPRESSVU 0802

FTE 0890

FINLUX 0482

FRACARRO 0898

FUBA 0423

GE 0593

GOI 0802

GALAXIS 0890, 1138

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0896

GOLD BOX 0880

GRUNDIG 0200, 0874

HTS 0802

HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423

HITACHI 0482, 0846

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM

0776, 1169, 1776

HUMAX 0890, 1203

INVIDEO 0898

JVC 0802

KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,

0276, 0685, 1248

KREISELMEYER 0200

LABGEAR 1323

LOGIX 1044

LORENZEN 0326

MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751

MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,

1110

MARANTZ 0227

MEDIASAT 0880

MEMOREX 0751

METRONIC 0111

MITSUBISHI 0776

MOTOROLA 0896

MYRYAD 0227

NEXT LEVEL 0896

NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,

1154, 1250, 1750

OCTALTV 1032

ORBITECH 1127

PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,

1350

PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,

1347

PANDA 0482

PAYSAT 0751

PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,

0749, 0751, 0776,

0880, 1103, 1169,

1776

PIONEER 0880

PROMAX 0482

PROSCAN 0419, 0593

RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,

0882

RFT 0227

RADIOSHACK 0896

RADIOLA 0227

RADIX 0423

SKY 0874, 0883, 1202

SM ELECTRONIC 1227

SABRE 0482

SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280

SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,

1319

SAT CONTROL 1327

SATSTATION 1110

SCHWAIGER 1138

SEEMANN 0423

SIEMENS 0200

SONY 0666, 0874, 1666

STAR CHOICE 0896

STRONG 1327

TPS 0847, 1280

TANTEC 0482

TECHNISAT 1126, 1127

TELESTAR 1127

THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,

1318

TOPFIELD 1233

TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776

ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666

UNIDEN 0749, 0751

UNIVERSUM 0200

VENTANA 0227

WISI 0200, 0423, 0482

XSAT 0150

ZEHNDER 1102

ZENITH 0883, 1883

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0056

CARVER 0056

GRUNDIG 0056

HARMAN/KARDON

0056

MAGNAVOX 0056

MARANTZ 0056

MYRYAD 0056

OPTIMUS 0054

PHILIPS 0056

PIONEER 0054

POLK AUDIO 0056

RCA 0054

REVOX 0056

SANSUI 0056

SONY 0270

THORENS 0056

WARDS 0054

YAMAHA 2700,2701

AGB 0543

AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,

0119, 0120, 0135,

0205, 0207, 0478

ASA 0131

AWA 0036

ACURA 0036

ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680

ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490

ADVENT 0788

AIKO 0119

AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,

0388, 0543, 0729,

0839

AKURA 0291

ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,

0695

AMERICA ACTION 0207

AMPRO 0778

AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,

0398, 0439, 0460,

0543

ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277

ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677

ANITECH 0036

APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,

0794

AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136

BANG & OLUFSEN 0592

BASIC 0036

BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539

BAYSONIC 0207

BEAUMARK 0205

BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,

0742

BELL & HOWELL 0181

BEON 0064

BLAUPUNKT 0222

BLUE SKY 0695, 1064

BONDSTEC 0274

BRADFORD 0207

BRANDT 0136, 0362

BROKSONIC 0263, 0490

BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,

0401, 0695, 1064

CCE 0064

CGE 0274

CTC 0274

CXC 0207

CANDLE 0057

CARNIVALE 0057

CARVER 0081, 0197

CASCADE 0036

CATHAY 0064

CELEBRITY 0027

CELERA 0792

CENTURION 0064

CHANGHONG 0792

CHING TAI 0036, 0119

CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,

0207

CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207

iii

CIMLINE 0036

CINERAL 0119, 0478

CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119

CLARION 0207

CLARIVOX 0064

CLATRONIC 0274, 0397

CONDOR 0347, 0397

CONRAC 0835

CONTEC 0036, 0207

CRAIG 0207

CROSLEY 0081

CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,

0397, 0445

CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,

0081, 0087, 0120,

0172, 0181, 0193,

0478, 0729, 1174,

1374

DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,

0119, 0135, 0181,

0197, 0205, 0207,

0401, 0478, 0650,

0661, 1688

DANSAI 0064

DAYTON 0036

DE GRAAF 0235, 0575

DECCA 0064, 0543

DENON 0172

DIGATRON 0064

DIXI 0036, 0064

DUMONT 0044

DWIN 0747, 0801

ECE 0064

ELBE 0286

ELECTROBAND 0027

ELIN 0064, 0575

ELITE 0347

ELTA 0036

EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,

0263, 0388, 0490,

0650

ENVISION 0057,0840

EPSON 0860

ERRES 0064

ETHER 0036, 0057

ETRON 0036

EUROPHON 0543

FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,

0265, 0314, 0362,

0587

FIDELITY 0388

FINLANDIA 0235, 0373

FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,

0373, 0543

FIRSTAR 0036, 0263

FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695

FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,

0397

FLINT 0482

FORMENTI 0064, 0347

FORTRESS 0120

FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291

FUJITSU 0710, 0836

FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291

FUTURETECH 0207

GE 0057, 0074, 0078,

0119, 0205, 0207,

0478, 0587, 1174,

1374, 1481

GEC 0064, 0543

GATEWAY 1782, 1783

GELOSO 0036

GENEXXA 0190

GIBRALTER 0044, 0057

GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,

0181, 0205, 0404

GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,

0661

GOREMJE 0397

GRADIENTE 0080, 0197

GRAETZ 0190, 0388

GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,

0543

GRANDIN 0637

GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,

0583, 0614

GRUNPY 0207

HCM 0036, 0439

HALLMARK 0205

HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207

HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,

0455, 0583

HANTAREX 0543

HARMAN/KARDON 0081

HARVARD 0207

HAVERMY 0120

HELLO KITTY 0478

HINARI 0036, 0064

HISAWA 0482

HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,

0132, 0136, 0172,

0190, 0205, 0252,

0383, 0508, 0575,

0605, 1172, 1283

HUA TUN 0036

HUANYU 0401

HYPSON 0064, 0291

ICE 0291, 0398

ITS 0398

ITT 0190, 0388, 0575

IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445

INDIANA 0064

INFINITY 0081

INGELEN 0190

INNO HIT 0543

INNOVA 0064

INTEQ 0044

INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,

0388, 0539

INTERVISION 0064, 0291,

0404

JBL 0081

JCB 0027

JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,

0680, 0710

JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,

0183, 0263

JENSEN 0788

KEC 0207

KTV 0057, 0207

KAISUI 0036

KAPSCH 0190

KARCHER 0637

KATHREIN 0583

KENDO 0064

KENWOOD 0057

KNEISSEL 0286, 0462

KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207

KORPEL 0064

KOYODA 0036

L&S ELECTRONIC 0835

LG 0057, 0064, 0087,

0135, 0205, 0741

LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0205

LEYCO 0064, 0291

LIESENK & TTER 0064

LOEWE 0539

LUXOR 0383, 0388

M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,

0131, 0132, 0136,

0190, 0314, 0373,

0401, 0507

MGA 0057, 0177, 0205

MTC 0057, 0087, 0539

MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543

MAGNAFON 0543

MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,

1481

MANESTH 0291, 0347

MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,

0583

MARK 0064

MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,

0398, 0514, 0543

MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677

MEDIATOR 0064

MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064

MEGATRON 0172, 0205

MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,

0205, 0277, 0490,

1064

METZ 0474

MICROMAXX 0835

MICROSTAR 0835

MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078

MINERVA 0514

MINOKA 0439

MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,

0177, 0181, 0205,

0207, 0263, 0277,

0539, 0863, 1277

MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,

0636

MOTOROLA 0120

MULTITECH 0036, 0207

MYRYAD 0583

NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,

0893

NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,

0181, 0183, 0197,

0205, 0482, 0524,

1731

NEI 0064

NTC 0119

NECKERMANN 0064, 0583

NETSAT 0064

NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,

0205

NIKKAI 0064, 0291

NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205

NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,

0575, 0658

NORCENT 0775, 0851

NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,

0587

OCEANIC 0190, 0388

ONWA 0207, 0460

OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,

0677

OPTONICA 0120

ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,

0490, 0543

OSAKI 0291, 0439

OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,

0539, 0583

PALLADIUM 0397, 0445

PANAMA 0291

PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,

0190, 0277, 0677,

1437

PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347

PAUSA 0036

PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,

0087, 0183, 0205,

1374

PERDIO 0347

PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,

0172, 0205, 0207,

0274, 0490, 1688

PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,

0078, 0081, 0119,

0135, 0205, 0401,

0583, 0717, 1481

PHONOLA 0064

PILOT 0057

PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,

0314, 0706, 0787,

0893

PORTLAND 0119

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0543

PRIMA 0788

PRISM 0078

PROFEX 0036, 0388

PROSCAN 0074

PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,

0291, 0445, 0695

PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205

PULSAR 0044

QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677

QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

R-LINE 0064

RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,

0117, 0119, 0205,

0706, 1074, 1174,

1274, 1374, 1474,

1481, 1574

RFT 0455

RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,

0181, 0205, 0207

RADIOLA 0064

RADIOMARELLI 0543

REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,

0207

REDIFFUSION 0388

REOC 0741

REVOX 0064

REX 0190, 0286, 0291

ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445

RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,

0630

SBR 0064

SEG 0291, 0695

SEI 0543

SKY 0064

SSS 0207

SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,

0362

SACCS 0265

SAGEM 0637

SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543

SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,

0575

SAMBERS 0543

SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,

0120, 0181, 0198,

0205, 0677, 1782

SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,

0087, 0117, 0119,

0181, 0205, 0291,

0397, 0583, 0614,

0645, 0729, 0793,

0839, 0841

SANSEI 0478

SANSUI 0490

SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,

0235, 0366, 0826

SCHAUB LORENZ 0388

SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,

0695

SCOTCH 0205

SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263

SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,

0183, 0198, 0205

SELECO 0190, 0286

SEMIVOX 0207

SEMP 0183

SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677

SHEN YING 0036, 0119

SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263

SIAREM 0543

SIEMENS 0064, 0222

SINUDYNE 0543

SKANTIC 0383

SKYGIANT 0207

SKYWORTH 0064

SOLAVOX 0190

SONITRON 0235

SONOKO 0036, 0064

SONOLOR 0190, 0235

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,

1127, 1532, 1678

SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207

SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445

SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,

0183, 0205

SQUAREVIEW 0198

STANDARD 0036

STARLITE 0207

STERN 0190, 0286

SUPREME 0027

SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198

SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207

SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0478

SYSLINE 0064

T + A 0474

TCM 0835

TMK 0205

TNCI 0044

TVS 0490

TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205

TAI YI 0036

TANDY 0120, 0190

TASHIKO 0119, 0677

TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,

0081, 0087, 0181,

0183, 0543

TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,

0439, 0445, 0482,

0695, 1064

TEC 0274

TECHNEMA 0347

TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677

TECHWOOD 0078

TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,

0120, 0205, 0291,

0680

TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,

0177, 0207

TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,

0362, 0652, 0729

TELEMEISTER 0347

TELETECH 0036

TENSAI 0347

TERA 0057

THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,

0652, 1474

THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,

0539

TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,

0535, 0645, 0677,

0859, 1283, 1383,

1683, 1731

TRIUMPH 0543

TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119

UHER 0347

UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,

0291, 0373, 0397,

0519

VECTOR RESEARCH

0057

VESTEL 0064

VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,

0680

VIDEOSAT 0274

VIDIKRON 0081

VIDTECH 0205

VIEWSONIC 1782

VISION 0347

VOXSON 0190

WALTHAM 0383

WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,

0893

WATSON 0064, 0347

WAYCON 0183

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0064, 0347, 0490,

0650

YAMAHA 0057, 0796, 0860,

2900, 2901, 2902

YAPSHE 0277

YOKO 0064, 0291

ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,

0490

VCR

ASA 0064, 0108

ADMIRAL 0075

ADVENTURA 0027

AIKO 0305

AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,

0375, 0379

AKAI 0068, 0342

AKIBA 0099

ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,

0379

AMERICA ACTION 0305

AMERICAN HIGH 0062

AMSTRAD 0027

ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,

0305, 0507

ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589

ANITECH 0099

ASHA 0267

ASUKA 0064

AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305

BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131

BASIC LINE 0099, 0305

BEAUMARK 0267

BELL & HOWELL 0131

BLAUPUNKT 0253

BRANDT 0347

BRANDT ELECTRONIC

0068

BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506

BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379

CCE 0099, 0305

CGE 0027

CALIX 0064

CANON 0062

CARVER 0108

CIMLINE 0099

CINERAL 0305

CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305

COLT 0099

COMBITECH 0379

CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,

0267

CROWN 0099, 0305

CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,

0087, 1062

CYBERNEX 0267

CYRUS 0108

DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,

0669, 1305

DANSAI 0099

DE GRAAF 0069

DECCA 0027, 0108

DENON 0069

DUAL 0068

DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131

DYNATECH 0027

ESC 0267, 0305

ELCATECH 0099

ELECTROHOME 0064

ELECTROPHONIC 0064

EMEREX 0059

EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,

0070, 0072, 0211,

0267, 0305, 1305,

1506

FERGUSON 0068, 0347

FIDELITY 0027

FINLANDIA 0108, 0131

FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,

0131

FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,

0099

FISHER 0074, 0131

FUJI 0060, 0062

FUJITSU 0027, 0072

FUNAI 0027

GE 0062, 0087, 0267,

0834, 1062, 1087

GEC 0108

GARRARD 0027

GENERAL 0072

GO VIDEO 0459

GOLDHAND 0099

GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,

1264

GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,

0305

GRADIENTE 0027

GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267

GRANADA 0108, 0131

GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099

GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,

0374

HCM 0099

HI-Q 0074

HANSEATIC 0064

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0027

HARMAN/KARDON 0108

HARWOOD 0099

HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379

HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,

0069, 0267

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0069

HYPSON 0099

ITT 0068, 0131, 0267

ITV 0064, 0305

IMPERIAL 0027

INTERFUNK 0108

JVC 0068, 0072, 0094

JENSEN 0068

KEC 0064, 0305

KLH 0099

KAISUI 0099

KENWOOD 0068, 0094

KODAK 0062, 0064

KOLIN 0068, 0070

KORPEL 0099

LG 0064, 0069, 0072,

0507

LXI 0064

LENCO 0305

LEYCO 0099

LLOYD’S 0027

LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589

LOGIK 0099, 0267

LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131

M ELECTRONIC 0027

MEI 0062

MGA 0070, 0267

MGN TECHNOLOGY

0267

MTC 0027, 0267

MAGNASONIC 1305

MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,

0108, 1808

MAGNIN 0267

MANESTH 0072, 0099

MARANTZ 0062, 0108

MARTA 0064

MATSUI 0375, 0379

MATSUSHITA 0062

MEDION 0375

MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,

0066, 0074, 0075,

0131, 0267, 0334,

0375, 1264

MEMPHIS 0099

METZ 0064, 0374, 1589

MINOLTA 0069

MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,

0108, 0834

MOTOROLA 0062, 0075

MULTITECH 0027, 0099

MURPHY 0027

MYRYAD 0108

NAD 0131

NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075, 0094, 0131

NATIONAL 0253

NECKERMANN 0108

NESCO 0099

NEWAVE 0064

NIKKO 0064

NOBLEX 0267

NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267

NORDMENDE 0068, 0347

OCEANIC 0027, 0068

OKANO 0342, 0375

OLYMPUS 0062, 0253

OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,

0459

ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,

1506

OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099

OTTO VERSAND 0108

PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099

PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,

0643, 1062, 1589

PATHE MARCONI 0068

PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,

0267, 1062, 1264

PENTAX 0069

PERDIO 0027

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WD64170-1

RX-V1500

AV Receiver

OWNER'S MANUAL

PHILCO 0062

PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,

1108, 1208

PHONOLA 0108

PILOT 0064

PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108

POLK AUDIO 0108

PROFITRONIC 0267

PROLINE 0027

PROSCAN 0087, 1087

PROTEC 0099

PULSAR 0066

PYE 0108

QUASAR 0062, 1062

QUELLE 0108

RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,

0267, 0834, 1062,

1087

RADIOSHACK 0027

RADIOLA 0108

RADIX 0064

RANDEX 0064

REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,

0074, 0075, 0131

REOC 0375

REPLAYTV 0641, 0643

REX 0068

ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,

0305

RUNCO 0066

SBR 0108

SEG 0267

SEI 0108

STS 0069

SABA 0068, 0347

SALORA 0070

SAMPO 0064, 0075

SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459

SANKY 0066, 0075

SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,

1506

SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267

SAVILLE 0379

SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,

0131

SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108

SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211

SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,

0069, 0074, 0131,

1264

SELECO 0068

SEMP 0072

SHARP 0075, 0834

SHINTOM 0099, 0131

SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131

SILVA 0064

SINGER 0072, 0099

SINUDYNE 0108

SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643

SONTEC 0064

SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,

0062, 0663, 1259

SUNKAI 0375

SUNSTAR 0027

SUNTRONIC 0027

SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,

0070, 1808

SYMPHONIC 0027

TMK 0267

TANDY 0027, 0131

TASHIKO 0027, 0064

TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,

0094, 0108

TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,

0334, 0669

TECHNICS 0062, 0253

TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,

0075

TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064

TELEAVIA 0068

TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347

TENOSAL 0099

TENSAI 0027

THOMAS 0027

THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,

0347

THORN 0068, 0131

TIVO 0645, 0663

TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,

0094, 0108, 0872

TOTEVISION 0064, 0267

UHER 0267

UNITECH 0267

UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,

0267

VECTOR 0072

VICTOR 0068, 0094

VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072

VIDEOMAGIC 0064

VIDEOSONIC 0267

VILLAIN 0027

WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,

0074, 0075, 0087,

0099, 0108, 0267

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0099

XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099

YAMAHA 0068

YAMISHI 0099

YOKAN 0099

YOKO 0267

ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,

1506

1500_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 9, 2005 3:47 PM

Documenttranscriptie

U PHILCO PHILIPS 0062 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 RX-V1500 AV Receiver © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER'S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WD64170 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a clean, dry cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. iii 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model ............. AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ..................................AC 220/230-240V, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................46 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 For movie/video sources.......................................... 46 For music sources .................................................... 49 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12 Speaker placement ................................................... 12 Speaker connections ................................................ 13 Before connecting components................................ 17 Connecting video components................................. 18 Connecting audio components................................. 21 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 23 Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 24 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 25 Turning on the power............................................... 25 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26 BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 31 Using BASIC MENU .............................................. 31 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 50 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 50 Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 51 Using the test tone ................................................... 52 SET MENU ............................................................53 Using SET MENU................................................... 54 Using SOUND MENU ............................................ 55 Using INPUT MENU .............................................. 60 Using OPTION MENU ........................................... 62 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................65 Control area ............................................................. 65 Setting remote control codes ................................... 66 Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) ................................................................. 68 Changing source names in the display window....... 70 Using the Macro feature .......................................... 71 Clearing function sets .............................................. 73 Clearing individual functions .................................. 74 Controlling each component.................................... 76 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Introduction.............................................................. 26 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26 Starting the setup ..................................................... 27 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................50 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 17 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 8 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) .....................77 Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 77 Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 78 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 33 TUNING ................................................................ 41 Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 41 Presetting stations .................................................... 42 Selecting preset stations........................................... 44 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 44 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......80 What is a sound field? ............................................. 80 Changing parameter settings ................................... 80 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................82 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................86 GLOSSARY...........................................................91 Audio formats .......................................................... 91 Sound field programs............................................... 92 Audio information ................................................... 93 Video signal information ......................................... 94 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RECORDING ....................................................... 45 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADVANCED OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 33 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 34 Additional operations............................................... 35 Selecting input modes.............................................. 40 SPECIFICATIONS...............................................95 English 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 120 W + 120 W Center: 120 W Surround: 120 W + 120 W Surround Back: 120 W + 120 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ SET MENU to optimize this unit for your audio/video system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi channel input ◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this unit ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening mode ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and learning/macro capability ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ THX Select ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24 ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx Decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning Automatic preset tuning Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) RDS: Radio Data System receiving capability (U.K. and Europe models only) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Used under authorization. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 2 GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Power Cord (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia, China and Korea models) Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea, Asia and General models) Speaker terminal wrench Optimizer microphone (U.K., Europe and Australia models) Remote control SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – SOURCE – TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. AM loop antenna MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash, or its light or display window become dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 4 5 67 8 3 9 0 (U.S.A. model) VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT EDIT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL YPAO EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC VIDEO AUX PHONES RDS MODE /FREQ A B C D E F G EON H PTY SEEK MODE L M START I J K N O (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 6 to 7-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. 6 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off). 2 INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 9 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when turned on (see page 37). 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. A SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. 5 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. 4 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS C INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 40). D OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 26). E A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). F PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station number 1 through 8 when a colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. ■ U.K. and Europe models only L RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display mode between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display mode. M EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. INTRODUCTION B MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). N PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode. O PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. G PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. H VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from an external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. I TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels (see page 35). To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. J PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). K STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. English 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 65. 1 2 3 C POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 SELECT 5 PRESET + AMP + + SOURCE 6 7 TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TITLE MENU 0 PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY 6 A/B/C/D/E Selects preset groups when this unit is in tuner mode. G 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. 8 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or SET MENU items. H I 9 TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. J 0 Sound field program/Numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs or input numbers. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when this unit is in tuner mode. K MUTE SET MENU 8 9 TV INPUT LEVEL D E F TV A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT EFFECT L M N O P A MACRO ON/OFF Turns the macro function on and off. B MACRO Use to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see page 71). ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. C STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. Q U MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP A B OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME R S t 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 Transmission indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 6 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. 5 PRESET +/– Selects preset station numbers when this unit is in tuner mode. SYSTEM POWER 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. D SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. E INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 40). F SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. G MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS H SELECT k/n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. ■ U.K. and Europe models only I VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. FREQ/RDS Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display. K MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. INTRODUCTION J AMP/SOURCE/TV Selects the component you want to control with the remote control. AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit. SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component selected with an input selector button. TV: Set to this position to operate the television. To set the remote control codes for components, see page 66. U RDS tuning buttons (Available when this unit is in tuner mode) PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode. PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. L PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 37). M SET MENU Selects the SET MENU mode. N NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 38). O ON SCREEN Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD) this unit sends to your monitor. P STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. Q EXTD. SUR Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of multi-channel software. R RE-NAME Used to change the input source name in the display window (see page 70). S CLEAR Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, or setting remote control codes (see page 73). T LEARN Used to set up the remote control code or program functions from other remote controls (see pages 66 and 68). English 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT EDIT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM PHONES S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT Approximately 6 m (20 ft) VIDEO AUX 30 30 ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity such as near a bath – high temperature such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperature – dusty places 8 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 NIGHT VIRTUAL 96 MATRIX 24 DISCRETE THX PCM 3 4 CBL/SAT SP AB 5 DTV 6 DVD MD/TAPE 7 8 CD–R CD TUNER B ft mS dB C D E F G (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and P Australia models only) PHONO PS PTY RT CT EON AUTO STEREO YPAO PTY HOLD MEMORY TUNED HiFi DSP SILENT CINEMA DIGITAL ZONE2 PL ZONE3 PL ZONE4 EX PL x SLEEP 0 A 9 H dB MUTE VOLUME 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR I J K L M NO Q (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. A PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 2 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. B SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 3 NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. C VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 39). D Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 4 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. E SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected, or when bi-wiring. 5 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. F SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 35). 6 YPAO indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. G Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 7 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 8 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 9 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. H HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. I MEMORY indicator Blinks to show a station can be stored. J TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. K MUTE indicator Blinks while the MUTE function is on. English 0 THX indicator Lights up when a THX program is selected. INTRODUCTION 2 1 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS L 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. M LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of current digital input signal. O Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the SPEAKERS setting (page 32) or SP LEVEL setting (page 57). P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on. Q RDS indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 10 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 3 AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R VIDEO VIDEO L R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE 5 6 REMOTE RS-232C IN DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 7 8 INTRODUCTION 1 CONTROL OUT OUT DVD +12V 15mA MAX. MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DTV IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT R + – A – + + – B – + L DIGITAL INPUT CD DVD FRONT CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) IN VCR 1 DTV CBL/SAT PHONO SURROUND FRONT IN COAXIAL AC OUTLETS R R FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. DVR/ VCR 2 + – – + AC OUTLETS L L R L SURROUND CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND + CD-R SUB WOOFER DVD CENTER R DVR/ VCR 2 CENTER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 3 R + – – + L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE SUB WOOFER GND L R GND FRONT (6CH)/SB (8CH) + AM ANT OUT CD CENTER – TUNER L – SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS C D SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) 9 0 A B E 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 21 for details. 9 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 18, 20 and 21 for details. 2 Audio component jacks See page 21 for connection information. 0 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 19 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 18 and 20 for connection information. A ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 77 for connection information. 4 RS-232C terminal (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. Consult your dealer for details. 5 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 77 for connection information. 6 CONTROL OUT jack (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 77 for connection information. 7 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 24). C PRE OUT jacks See page 22 for connection information. D Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. E PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 14 for connection information. < Asia and General models only > FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 23. English 8 AC INLET (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia, China and Korea models only) Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 24). B Antenna terminals See page 23 for connection information. VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 24. 11 SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement For best results, place the speakers as illustrated below. PL PR C FR FL 30˚ SL SR The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. SBR More than 30 cm (12 in) . 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) y The illustrations show the standard speaker setting recommended by the ITU-R (see page 93). You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel audio sources, and THX. Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 12 Subwoofer Presence speakers (PR and PL) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 46). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Note Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in SOUND MENU (see page 60). SPEAKER SETUP ■ Di-pole speaker layout Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please place the surround and surround back speakers according to the speaker layout below. FL FR C SR 30˚ 30˚ SBL SBR : Di-pole speaker : Direction of di-pole speaker Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 25). • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the power of this unit is off. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 10 mm (3/8 in) 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Loosen the knob. The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for loosening or tightening knobs. 4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. 13 PREPARATION SL Speaker connections SPEAKER SETUP 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Speaker terminal wrench 5 4 3 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals 1 3 2 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. ■ Banana plug connections (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 14 SPEAKER SETUP 9 10 4 2 1 8 Front speakers (A) Right Left 7 3 6 5 Subwoofer with built-in amplifier Center speaker Speaker layout 2 PREPARATION 1 Front speakers (B) 4 3 RC-232C R FRONT + – – + + – – + + – – + L CENTER – + SURROUND R L L R + SUB WOOFER R + – – + L – SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 SPEAKERS (U.S.A. model) 7 8 Right Left Surround speakers 5 6 Right Left Surround back speakers 9 10 Right Left Presence speakers • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in SOUND MENU (see page 60). • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 15 SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals ■ CENTER terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the FRONT A or B terminals. Connect a center speaker to these terminals. Note ■ SUBWOOFER jack The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems simultaneously. Bi-wired connection The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and B light up in the front panel display. Bi-wired connection ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. Note (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see page 64). + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R This unit 16 L CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. Dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. For analog signals ■ Video jacks left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO jacks. When V CONV. is set to “ON” (see page 63), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y V V ■ Analog jacks V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jack For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Only when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 63) Note When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. 17 PREPARATION ■ Cable indications CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Coaxial out Optical out Video out DVD player Audio out C R O L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R AUDIO L VIDEO VIDEO L R DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE DVD MD/TAPE OUT (REC) DIGITAL INPUT Video in CD IN (PLAY) DVD CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) TUNER AM ANT CD COAXIAL M GND CBL/SAT PHONO FM ANT MAIN/SURROUND BACK SUR CD 75Ω UNBAL. ZONE 2 SURROUND SUB WOO DVD DTV SUB WOOFER GND CENTER MULCH CH INPUT ZONE 3 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) 18 Video monitor CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier. If you set MULTI CH INPUT 6ch/8ch to “8ch” (see page 62), you can use input jacks assigned as MULTI CH INPUT FRONT (page 62) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input AUDIO R SURROUND SURROUND IN (PLAY) AUDIO L R L DVD MD/TAPE DTV SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER CENTER IN (PLAY) CENTER CBL /SAT MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT CD-R IN VCR 1 R L Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Center out Front out Multi-format player/ External decoder Surround out Subwoofer out Surround back out R L CD Surround out Multi-format player/ External decoder IN DVR/ VCR 2 R Front out L Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output. 19 PREPARATION FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Video out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out R O L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R VIDEO VIDEO L R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE IN (PLAY) CD-R MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DIGITAL INPUT CD CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R CD-R OUT (REC) IN TUNER VCR 1 DVD AM ANT OUT CD MA GND CBL/SAT PHONO IN COAXIAL DVR/ VCR 2 MAIN/SURROUND BACK FM ANT SURR CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD-R SUB WOOF DVD DVR/ VCR2 SUB WOOFER GND Connect a YAMAHA CD recorder that outputs OSD signals. ZONE 3 CENTER MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) C R L R L Audio in Video in DVD recorder or VCR Audio out Video out Coaxial out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or camcorder, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX L R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S-video out 20 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components Optical in MD recorder or tape deck Audio out Audio in R O L R L R PREPARATION AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L L R MD/TAPE IN (PLAY) CD-R Optical in MD/TAPE OUT (REC) O DIGITAL INPUT Optical out Audio out CD IN (PLAY) O L CD-R R OUT (REC) Audio out DVD R CD Audio in L CD player R CBL/SAT PHONO COAXIAL CD recorder* L * MAIN/SURROUND BACK CD C Coaxial out Some CD recorders can be connected to the VIDEO CD-R jacks (see page 20). ZONE 2 SURROUND DVD Audio out DTV SUB WOOFER GND L CENTER MULCH CH INPUT ZONE 3 OUTPUT R (U.S.A. model) GND Turntable ■ Connecting a turntable y PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 21 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see page 64), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. 1 L R FRONT 2 R L SURROUND 3 4 SUB WOOFER CENTER R 5 L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals output from SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the correct speakers. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker levels” on page 51). • Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 55) and LFE/BASS OUT (see page 56) settings. 22 CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VD Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. TV PREPARATION ■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) ONITOR OUT TUNER AM ANT MAIN GND 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. SURRO SUB WOOFE Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 3 Cut the lead wire and remove it. 4 Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Unit: mm (in) Lead wire Clamp Clamp Insert wire into slot 5 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. Snap the cover into place. ■ FREQUENCY STEP switch (Asia and General models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set FM AM the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. • North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz • Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s AC power cord from the wall outlet. 100kHz/10kHz 50kHz/9kHz FREQUENCY STEP 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. 23 CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cord ■ Connecting the AC power cord (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia, China and Korea models) Plug the power cord into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the power cord to an AC wall outlet. AC OUTLETS CAUTION Do not use other AC power cords. Use the one provided. Use of other power cords may result in fire hazard or electrical shock. (Other models) Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) (U.S.A. model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 VOLTAGE SELECTOR U.K. and Australia models.............................. 1 OUTLET Korea model .............................................................. None Other models.................................................. 2 OUTLETS Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W Other models ........................................................... 100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model........AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ............................ AC 220/230-240V, 50/60 Hz ■ Memory back-up (General model) 24 The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. CAUTION If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power. 1 Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. VOLUME INPUT 1 On the front panel, while holding down SPEAKERS A, press STANDBY/ON. “SP IMP.SET” appears in the front panel display for a few seconds, then “Minimum 8ohms” appears. PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL YPAO EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT VIDEO AUX SPEAKERS A (U.S.A. model) STANDBY /ON SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 1 SP IMP.SET SELECT AMP + Minimum 8ohms 2 3 1 SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel y You can also use SP IMP.SET (see page 63) to set the speaker impedance. + Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or SPEAKERS B to select the impedance of your speakers. You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms. Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting. This unit will be set to the standby mode. + 2 or Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Note Press STANDBY/ON again (STANDBY on the remote control) to enter the standby mode. 25 PREPARATION SPEAKERS A AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE TUNER y MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES The basic setup feature (page 31) is useful if you want to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. However, we recommend that you come back and perform auto setup later to take advantage of YPAO and enjoy even higher fidelity. S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL YPAO OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT VIDEO AUX Notes Notes • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 29. YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. SIZE Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel. EQUALIZING Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. LEVEL Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 26 • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. –Keep it away from direct sunlight. –Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 4 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press k / n repeatedly to select WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE, EQUALIZING or LEVEL. 1 AUTO:MENU .WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQUALIZING;;FLAT LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO START PUSH > y If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. p /p : Up/Down < / > : Select CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME MIN MAX MIN CHECK To automatically check and adjust the selected MAX Subwoofer 1 2 SKIP Switch on this unit and video monitor. Make sure the OSD is displayed (see page 50). When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure that “SMALL” or “SMLx2” is selected in SPEAKER SET (page 55) and that 80Hz (THX) is selected in CROSS OVER (page 57). SET MENU then When EQUALIZING is selected, press l / h to select: FRONT To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. FLAT To average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. LOW To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of bass frequencies. MID To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of mid-range frequencies. HIGH To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of high frequencies. SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. MENU SOURCE TV 3 Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP, then press h once to enter the main menu. ENTER SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP p /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter 6 ENTER item. To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. Note Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is selected, press l / h to select: Press n to select SETUP, then press l / h to select: AUTO To automatically perform the entire auto setup procedure. STEP To pause for confirmation between each check in the auto setup procedure. RELOAD To restore the last auto setup setting. 27 PREPARATION 5 AUTO SETUP y 7 Press n to select START PUSH i, then press h. Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure. Notes Note If “E-10:OTHER ERROR” appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3. If you selected “AUTO” in step 6 The RESULT display appears for a few seconds after each check, then settings of the next item will start. The RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set. y You can display each result by pressing k once and pressing h repeatedly before exiting. Pressing n returns to the RESULT:EXIT display. 8 To apply the changes, press l / h to select SET, then press n to exit. To cancel the auto setup procedure, press l / h to select CANCEL, then press n to exit. If you selected “STEP” in step 6 The RESULT display appears after each check. 8 Press l / h to display RESULT:EXIT, then press l / h to select: NEXT EXIT Then press n to proceed and check the next item. Then press n to exit the auto setup. RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK p p RESULT:DISTANCE1 RESULT:EQUALIZI. EQ;;;;;FRONT L 63Hz;;;-2.0dB 125Hz;;;-5.0dB 500Hz;;;;;;0dB 630Hz;;;;;;0dB 1.0kHz;;;;;;0dB 3.15kHz;;;+3.0dB 10.0kHz;;;+1.0dB / p p / : Up/Down </> : Back/Next : Up/Down RESULT:LEVEL 1 / : Up/Down </> : Back/Next / : Up/Down </> : Back/Next RESULT:SIZE 1 p p / : Up/Down </> : Back/Next p p . FRONT L;;;+5.0dB CENTER;;;;-4.5dB FRONT R;;;+5.5dB PRESENCE;;-3.0dB p p . FRONT L;;;;3.20m CENTER;;;;;3.30m FRONT R;;;;2.90m PRES L;;;;;1.70m PRES R;;;;;1.50m FRONT L;;;;;;LRG 28 • Press k / n repeatedly to move between each display. • If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page 55). • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform AUTO SETUP again to recalibrate your system. • In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the EQUALIZING results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. If you selected “RELOAD” in step 6 The RESULT:EXIT display appears. y You can display each result by pressing k once and pressing h repeatedly before exiting. Pressing n returns to the RESULT:EXIT display. 8 Press l / h to select “SET”, then press n to exit. AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. Error message Cause Remedy E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B. • Check the front L/R speaker connections. E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E-3:NO PRES. SP A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup procedure in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners (etc.) or move them away from the optimizer microphone. E-6:CHECK SURR. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when you use (a) surround back speaker(s). E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E-9:USER CANCEL The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to user activity. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. E-10:OTHER ERROR An internal error occurred. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. 29 PREPARATION During auto setup Press l / h to display the detailed information about individual errors. Select “RETRY” to try auto setup procedure again. AUTO SETUP After auto setup Press l / h to display the detailed information about individual warnings. Warning message • • • • Cause Remedy W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. • Check the speaker connections. • Use speakers of similar quality. • Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. W-4:SWFR PHASE The phase polarity of the subwoofer is not correct. • Select the opposite phase on the subwoofer if the subwoofer has a phase switch. W-5:VOL ERROR The result may not be correct because the volume was changed during the auto setup procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not change the volume during the auto setup procedure. If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again. If warning W-1, W-4 or W-5 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made. If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. 30 BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP The basic system parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (page 26). Basic setup is useful if you want to quickly setup your speakers or to manually adjust some of the items set in auto setup. 3 Press l / h to enter BASIC MENU. 4 When ROOM is selected, press l / h to change the setting. Select the size of the room you have installed your speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are defined as follows: y If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in SOUND MENU (page 55) instead of BASIC MENU. [U.S.A. and Canada models] S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft2 (4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2) M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft2 (6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2) L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft2 (7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m2) Altering any parameters in BASIC MENU will reset all parameters in SOUND MENU. Using BASIC MENU [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2 SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU 2-9 1 1 BASIC MENU 1/2 PURE DIRECT .ROOM: S[ML SWFR:[YESNONE PRESENCE;;;;NONE SPEAKERS;;;;7spk NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP 5 SET MENU SOURCE then MENU YES NONE TV 2 Press k / n repeatedly to select MANUAL SETUP, then press l / h to enter the selected category. then ENTER Press n to select SWFR, then press l / h to select: 6 If you have a subwoofer in your system. If you do not have a subwoofer in your system. Press n to select PRESENCE, then press l / h to select: YES NONE If you have presence speakers in your system. If you do not have presence speakers in your system. ENTER SET MENU ;AUTO SETUP . ;MANUAL SETUP p /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter If k is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if n is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press SET MENU to open SET MENU again. 31 PREPARATION Note BASIC SETUP 7 Press n to select SPEAKERS, then press l / h to select the number of speakers connected to the unit. The choices vary as follows depending on the PRESENCE setting: 9 Press n to select CHECK OK?, then press l / h to select: YES NO To exit the setup if the test tones were satisfactory. To adjust each speaker level (see page 57). PRESENCE setting Choices 1 BASIC MENU 2/2 NONE YES Front L/R 2 — — L C R SL SB SR 3 — — L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Surround L/R . CHECK OK?;;;;YES (when “NO” is selected) 4 L 5 L C R 6 7 8 L SL R R SR L C R SL SR L C R SL SB SR L C R SL SB SR 9 * Presence L/R, Front L/R Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center L C R SL SB SR Presence L/R, Front L/R, Surround L/R L C R SL SB SR Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back L/R Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back* — — Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back L/R* — — After you have finished the settings, press n, then press l / h to select: SET CANCEL To apply the changes. To cancel the setup. 1 BASIC MENU 2/2 . [SET CANCEL ROOM SIZE=MEDIUM If you select “SET”, you will hear a test tone from each speaker. 32 FR C SL + Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in SOUND MENU (see page 60). 8 B)SPEAKER LEVEL . Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 1 4 4 6 Select the input source. Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD INPUT VOLUME or INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT Front panel VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 3 7 V–AUX 1 POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU DVD PURE DIRECT PHONO dB VOLUME AUTO L R NIGHT CBL/SAT MD/TAPE AUDIO TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY Selected input source STRAIGHT Input mode CD-R STEREO VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON DVD SELECT AMP REC SOURCE DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO 7 TV MUTE TV INPUT SET MENU TITLE MENU Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. +10 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME TV MUTE LEVEL 5 EXTD. SUR A/B/C/D/E 1 CBL/SAT EFFECT V-AUX DTV 7 VCR 1 MUTE PURE DIRECT VOLUME + Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. or VOL – SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Front panel Front panel Remote control Remote control 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel. Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. SPEAKERS A B When bi-wiring, select both A and B. 33 BASIC OPERATION POWER TV INPUT ENTER 6 DVR/VCR2 SP A TV MUTE SYSTEM 4 Remote control The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. PLAYBACK 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 46 for details about sound field programs. Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT PROGRAM or ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SOURCE ENTERTAIN MUSIC TY THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 TV THX STANDARD 9 0 AMP STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E 8 PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT M MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES Front panel MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EXTD. SUR +10 EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX ENT. Remote control (U.S.A. model) PROGRAM Note When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX recommendation). Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM DialNorm;;+4dB V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R HiFi DSP JAZZ CLUB Program name 34 CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation Additional operations AMP + + + AMP/SOURCE/TV SOURCE TV VOL – CH VOL – – ■ To adjust the tone TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 Sound field program buttons ROCK EXTD. SUR +10 PROGRAM ENT. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. AMP SOURCE DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 DVD MD/TAPE ROCK EXTD. SUR +10 CD–R HiFi DSP JAZZ CLUB Notes ENT. CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and center speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 46) or PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • TONE CONTROL is not effective for headphones. Use HP TONE CTRL to adjust bass/treble balance for the headphones (page 59). ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. MUTE The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. y You can adjust the muting level (see page 59). ■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a 2ch stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. 35 BASIC OPERATION TV V–AUX You can adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels. Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly on the front panel to select TREBLE or BASS. Select TREBLE, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the highfrequency response. Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the low-frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT PLAYBACK ■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. ■ Enjoying multi-channel software in 6.1/7.1 channel surround If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multichannel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD. SUR on the remote control to switch between 5.1and 6.1/7.1 channel playback. EXTD. SUR ENT. To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly when PLIIxMovie (etc.) is displayed. AUTO (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. 36 Decoders (select with l / h) You can select from the following modes depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. OFF (OFF) For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1 channels. y When SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 56), the surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PLIIxMovie, PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD. SUR is pressed in the following cases: – When SURR L/R SP or SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56). – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround L/R channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When 2ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, this unit decodes the DTS 96/24 signals using DTS-ES Matrix decoder. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56). • “PLIIxMovie” cannot be selected when SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 56). PLAYBACK ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Press STANDARD on the remote control to select the decoder. STANDARD 0 ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound with PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct. The button lights up and the front panel display automatically goes out. You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT or PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources Movie* PRO LOGIC IIx Music* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software. PRO LOGIC IIx Game* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software. DTS Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. DTS Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. * Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 85). Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56). Remote control y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL (page 35) and SET MENU (page 53) settings are not effective. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting SET MENU parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. 37 BASIC OPERATION PRO LOGIC IIx Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software. Front panel PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound with Direct Stereo Direct Stereo bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors, allowing you to enjoy high fidelity sound from 2-channel PCM and analog sources. y This operation is recommended for use when high fidelity stereo sound is desired with playback of a video source. Otherwise, PURE DIRECT is recommended for the highest possible sound fidelity (see page 37). ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. NIGHT Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO repeatedly) to select DIRECT STEREO. The front panel display automatically dims. STEREO PROGRAM or Front panel HALL JAZZ Remote control ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 EXTD. SUR +10 AUDIO ENT. Remote control Direct Stereo Notes • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press l / h to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically selects an analog signal input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL (page 35) and SET MENU (page 53) settings are not effective. ENTER Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT, MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 38 PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. PROGRAM or Front panel STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine images from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. ROCK Use the input selector buttons to select a video source, then select an audio source. EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. Audio sources Remote control 2ch Stereo PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Video sources Note You can use a subwoofer with this program when “SWFR” or “BOTH” is selected in LFE/BASS OUT. ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. If you set SURR L/R SP to “NONE”, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when SURR L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 39 BASIC OPERATION In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Note PLAYBACK ■ Displaying information about the input source Selecting input modes You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signal you want to use. 1 1 Select the input source. INPUT or PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 Front panel 2 Select the input source. Remote control PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press STRAIGHT/EFFECT so that “STRAIGHT” appears in the display. Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. AMP STRAIGHT SOURCE then TRANSMIT or Front panel V–AUX DVR/VCR2 POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN Remote control VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A DVD AUTO CD TUNER DTS ANALOG * 3 Press k / n to display the following information about the input signal. ENTER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Input mode AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. (Format) in fs rate flg y • You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 61). • DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD encoded in DTS. Note If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. 40 EFFECT TV SYSTEM INPUT MODE Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/LFE”. Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” appears. Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears. Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Note The display shows “3/2/LFE” even when you play DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 sources that include 3 surround channels. TUNING TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 4 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. PRESET/ TUNING PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU AUTO TUNED PROGRAM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX 3 (U.S.A. model) If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input source. BASIC OPERATION 4 32 1 DVD ■ Manual tuning TUNING MODE TUNER B DTV When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT SPEAKERS CBL/SAT SP A A~~AM~1530 kHz 1 A VCR 1 INPUT TUNING MODE Front panel AUTO Disappears AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. FM/AM or PRESET /TUNING 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE EDIT 3 AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. PRESET /TUNING EDIT VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU SP A A~~AM~1440 kHz Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to PRESET/ TUNING continue searching. TU AUTO A~~AM~1440 kHz 41 TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. VOLUME Automatic preset tuning options INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX 1 32 1 (U.S.A. model) Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER AUTO MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 42 • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. 4 VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 through 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT 3 4 VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 2,5 V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A 1 C3:AM Tune into a station. See page 41 for tuning instructions. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD SP A TUNER TUNED A :AM 630 kHz PHONO 5 dB VOLUME L R 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. V–AUX VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV C3:AM MAN'L/AUTO FM A/B/C/D/E DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C :AM DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED 630 kHz dB VOLUME L R DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER TUNED 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A through E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 SP A MEMORY 3 630 kHz PHONO Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear in the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MEMORY Flashes TUNER 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. PHONO dB VOLUME L R 43 BASIC OPERATION When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. CD MEMORY TUNED TUNING Selecting preset stations Exchanging preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME INPUT VOLUME PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING FM/AM TUNING MODE MEMORY PROGRAM TUNER SILENT VIDEO AUX SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 1 2 (U.S.A. model) 1,3 1,3 2,4 2 AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV 1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 1 When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A/B/C/D/E CR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz EDIT A/B/C/D/E or TV INPUT Front panel 2 PRESET /TUNING 3 Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/– on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 through 8). The preset group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. PRESET PRESET/ TUNING Select preset station “A5” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED A5:FM 90.6 MHz 4 PHONO dB VOLUME L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. + or DTV SP A PRESET /TUNING CH – EDIT Front panel Remote control V–AUX VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz 44 DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A EDIT CD TUNER TUNED E1-A5 PHONO dB VOLUME L R RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for those components. 1 2 VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM TUNING MODE RDS MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R START TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) SYSTEM 2 POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 1 2 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, SPEAKER LEVEL (page 57) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. y Always do a test recording before you start an actual recording. 45 BASIC OPERATION 1 POWER Notes SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 40) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program Features STEREO: 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel sources as is. MUSIC VIDEO This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling that you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT: Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. TV THEATER: Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. TV THEATER: Variety/Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. MOVIE THEATER: Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. THX: THX Cinema THX processing for any multi-channel source. 2-channel sources are decoded by the PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II, PRO LOGIC IIx or DTS Neo: 6 decoder before THX processing. 46 Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features THX: THX Surr. EX THX processing for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital EX sources. This program is available only when surround back L/R speakers are connected to this unit and when the input source contains surround back channel signals. THX: dts ES + THX THX processing for DTS-ES sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIxMovie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIxMovie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital sources. DTS: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources. DTS: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS 96/24: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS ES Disc6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS ES Disc6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS 96/24 ES: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. Sources MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 47 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features PRO LOGIC: SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.* PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.* DTS: Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. * You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro 48 Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 85. Sources 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program Features CONCERT HALL HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. JAZZ CLUB HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. ROCK CONCERT HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock venue. The listener’s virtual seat is at the centerleft of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. q D+PLIIxMusic: SUR. STANDARD Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. q D+PLIIxMusic: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. STEREO: 2ch Stereo 2 (left and right) channel playback. STEREO: Direct Stereo Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.* DTS: Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. Sources MULTI 2-CH MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 2-CH * You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 85. 49 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS Selecting the OSD mode Using the sleep timer You can display this unit’s operating information on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information in the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the OSD mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short DISPLAY display, and display off. Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 ON SCREEN SELECT Full display Always shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. Display off Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU or the test tone feature, even if the OSD mode is set to “Display off”. P08 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP OFF Sci-Fi .DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INITDLY;;16ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INITDLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 V–AUX Short display Notes SLEEP SLEEP 30 min. SLEEP 60 min. VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME SLEEP 120min L R The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. V–AUX • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded. • When the component video signals are input, short display is not output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using DISPLAY SET (see page 62). 50 SLEEP 90 min. SP A P08MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi Full display DVR/VCR2 SLEEP DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD SP A SLEEP CONCERT HALL TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. SLEEP y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. Manually adjusting speaker levels You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26), “Speaker level” (page 57) and “Using the test tone” (page 52). AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE 2 TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT 3 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. FRONT L CENTER FRONT R SUR.R SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SUR.L SWFR PRES Front left speaker level Center speaker level Front right speaker level Surround right speaker level Surround back right speaker level Surround back left speaker level Surround left speaker level Subwoofer level Presence speaker level y Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by pressing k / n. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 Press l / h to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. 51 ADVANCED OPERATIONS Using the test tone 6 You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26), “Speaker level” (page 57) and “Manually adjusting speaker levels” (page 51). Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard from your listening position. TEST TEST TEST TEST + + CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU 4,7 2,5,8 TV INPUT PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT 3,6 EFFECT 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press TEST. The unit outputs a test tone. 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST LEFT CENTER RIGHT SUR. R SUR. B. R SUR. B. L SUR. L SUBWOOFER Front left speaker Center speaker Front right speaker Surround right speaker Surround back right speaker Surround back left speaker Surround left speaker Subwoofer 4 Press l / h to adjust speaker volumes. 5 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. If PRESENCE SP in SPEAKER SET is set to “YES” (see page 56), proceed to step 6 to adjust the presence speaker volumes. If PRESENCE SP in SPEAKER SET is set to “NONE”, the test tone stops. 52 Front speakers Presence speakers Presence left speaker Presence right speaker Press l / h to adjust the presence speaker volumes. 8 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. AMP + TV VOL FRONT PRESENCE PRES L PRES R 7 Note You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack. Press k / n repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to output the test tone. y • If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. • Before outputting the test tone, we recommend that you set the output volume to 0 dB. SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ AUTO SETUP Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26). ■ MANUAL SETUP Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings. BASIC MENU Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 31). SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. y Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 26). You can use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. Item Features Page Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 55 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 57 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 57 D)GRAPHIC EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 58 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 G)LOW FRQ. TEST Matches the subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers. 59 H)HP TONE CTRL Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones. 59 I)AUDIO SET Customizes overall audio settings of this unit. 59 Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are J)PR/SBch SELECT connected to this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION A)SPEAKER SET 60 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode, rename your inputs, or specify external input settings. Item Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 60 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 61 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the inputs. 61 Sets the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels for the D)MULTI CH INPUT source component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 62 53 SET MENU OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system settings. Item * Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the settings of the OSD and the front panel display and converts video signals. 62 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 63 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 63 D)SP IMP. SET Selects the impedance of your speakers. 63 E)ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 64 F)ZONE2 SET* Selects the Zone 2 mode. 64 G)ZONE3 SET* Selects the Zone 3 mode. 64 (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Using SET MENU 1 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP SET MENU SOURCE then AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU 2,3,4 PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT 2,3,5 2 EFFECT STEREO 5 HALL JAZZ MENU TV ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX SURROUND 9 0 Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP, then press l / h to enter the selected category. SUR. BACK +10 ENT. y You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. then ENTER ENTER Note You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode. SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP p p / : Up/Down < / > : Enter Note If k is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if n is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press SET MENU to open SET MENU again. 3 54 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then press l / h to enter the menu item. Repeat this operation to navigate to and enter the setup mode of the item you want to adjust. SET MENU 4 5 Press l / h repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. To exit, press k / n repeatedly until the menu disappears or just press one of the sound field program group buttons. Using SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 26). 2 SOUND MENU 1/3 ENTER or HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TY THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 THX STANDARD 9 0 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. . A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)GRAPHICEQ /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter p STEREO ■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Note Set any THX speakers to SMALL (SML). Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG CENTER SP NONE [SML LRG Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE FRONT SP [SMALL LARGE • Select “SMALL” if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT. • Select “LARGE” if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. 55 ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “NONE” if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. • Select “SML” if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT. • Select “LRG” if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. SET MENU Surround left/right speakers Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SURR L/R SP SURR L/R SP NONE [SML LRG • Select “NONE” if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 39) and automatically set the surround back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP) to “NONE”. • Select “SML” if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/ BASS OUT. • Select “LRG” if you have large surround left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the surround speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. Surround back speakers SURR B L/R SP Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE SURR B L/R SP SMLx1 [SMLx2 • Select “LRGx2” if you have 2 large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select “LRGx1” if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the left surround back speaker. • Select “SMLx2” if you have 2 small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT. • Select “SMLx1” if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the left surround back speaker. • Select “NONE” if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select “LRGx1” or “SMLx1”, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 56 Presence speakers Choices: NONE, YES PRESENCE SP PRESENCE SP [NONE YES • Select “YES” if you have presence speakers. • Select “NONE” if you do not have presence speakers. LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers according to the characteristics of your system. This setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRNT, BOTH THX recommendation: SWFR LFE/BASS OUT [SWFR FRNT BOTH • Select “SWFR” if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. • Select “FRNT” if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front speakers according to the speaker settings (even if you have previously set front speakers to SML). • Select “BOTH” if you connect a subwoofer and you want to output low-frequency signals from front channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are also directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce lowfrequency signals using the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs. SET MENU Cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz THX recommendation: “80Hz” ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds arrive at the listening position at the same time. CROSS OVER C)SP DISTANCE . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;3.00m FRONTR;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;3.00m FREQ;;;80Hz(THX) p /p : Up/Down < / > : Adjust ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left (or surround left) speaker and each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 55). Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB B)SPEAKER LEVEL . FR C SL + * SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56). y If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft) • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SB L* adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SB R* adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) * “SURR B” will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56). 57 ADVANCED OPERATION • FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right speakers. • C adjusts the balance of the front left and center speakers. • SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround left speakers. • SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back left speakers. • SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back right speakers. • SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround right speakers. • SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and subwoofer. • PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence speakers. Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft) Other models: meters (m) • Select “meters” to input speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to input speaker distances in feet. SET MENU ■ Graphic equalizer D)GRAPHIC EQ Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic equalizer (GEQ). Equalizer select EQ SELECT Choices: PEQ, GEQ D) GRAPHIC EQ . EQ SELECT....PEQ p p / : Up/Down </> : Select ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) F)DYNAMIC RANGE . SP: MIN STD[MAX HP: MIN STD[MAX / : Up/Down </> : Select p p • Select “PEQ” to use the equalizer adjusted in auto setup. • Select “GEQ” to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic equalizer (see “Equalizer” below). Equalizer Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R and surround back L/R speakers with that of the front L/R speakers. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB) D)GRAPHIC EQ . CHANNEL;;FRONT L + 63Hz 0dB 160Hz 0dB 400Hz 0dB 1kHz 0dB 2.5kHz 0dB 6.3kHz 0dB 16kHz 0dB You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 (dB) E)LFE LEVEL . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p / : Up/Down </> : Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack. 58 Speaker SP Select to adjust the speaker compression. Headphone HP Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select “MIN” if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” for general use. • Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. SET MENU ■ Low frequency test G)LOW FRQ. TEST ■ Headphone tone control H)HP TONE CTRL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches your other speakers. Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your headphones. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB) G)LOW FRQ.TEST H)HP TONE CTRL . TEST TONE;;;;OFF OUTPUT;FRONT L/R FRQ;;;;;;;;;88Hz . BASS TRBL + 0dB / : Up/Down </> : Adjust 1 Press n to go to OUTPUT and press l / h to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. Choices: FRONT L/R, FRONT L, CENTER, FRONT R, SUR.R, SBR*, SBL*, SUR.L, SWFR, PRESENCE * “SB” will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56). Press n to go to FRQ and press l / h to select the frequency you want to use. Choices: 35 to 250 (Hz), WIDE Initial: 88 Hz 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. y You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. ■ Audio set I)AUDIO SET Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings. I)AUDIO SET . AUDIO MUTE;;MUTE AUDIO DELAY;;0ms DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF / : Exit </> : Select Mute MUTE Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select “MUTE” to completely halt all output of sound. • Select “–20 dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio Delay AUDIO DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 240 (ms) Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT Use to turn on/off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see page 85). This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect. • Select “OFF” to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect. Note DIALG.LIFT appears only when PRESENCE is set to “YES” (see page 31). 59 ADVANCED OPERATION 3 • Use BASS to adjust the headphone bass level. • Use TRBL to adjust the headphone treble level. p p 2 Press l / h to set TEST TONE to ON, and adjust the volume with VOL –/+ so you can hear the tone. Do not turn up the volume too high. If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter, as well as a wide-band noise. SET MENU ■ Presence/surround back channel select J)PR/SBch SELECT Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker set when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRch, SBch Using INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs. 3 INPUT MENU . A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)MULTI CH INPUT p /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter J)PR/SBch SELECT PRch [SBch p p / : Exit </> : Select • Select “PRch” to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select “SBch” to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. Note The default settings are displayed with parentheses on the OSD. CMPNT-V IN for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, CD-R CMPNT-V INPUT . [A];;;;; DVD ( DVD ) [B];;;;; DTV (DTV) OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2) Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD OPTICAL OUT . (1);;;;;MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE ) (2);;;;; CD-R (CD-R) 60 SET MENU OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3), (4), (5) and (6) Choices: CD, PHONO, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the OSD and front panel display. C)INPUT RENAME OPTICAL IN DVD . (3);;;;; CD ( CD ) (4);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (5);;;;; DTV (DTV ) COAXIAL IN . (7);;;;; CD ( CD ) (8);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (9);;;;;DVR/VCR2 (DVR/VCR2) </> : Position / : Character 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 3 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 4 Press k / n to select the character you want to use and l / h to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, space, 0 to 9, space, a to z, space, #, *, +, etc. 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each input. 6 Press h repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 40 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST DVD p p COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7), (8) and (9) Choices: CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R -> ADVANCED OPERATION B)INPUT MODE [AUTO LAST p p / : Exit </> : Select • Select “AUTO” to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Note The last setting for the EXTD. SUR button will not be recalled, even when “LAST” is selected. 61 SET MENU ■ Multi Channel Input D)MULTI CH INPUT Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. Using OPTION MENU 4 OPTION MENU1/2 . A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)SP IMP. SET p /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter D)MULTI CH INPUT ■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET A)DISPLAY SET p p . [6CH 8CH (FRNT/SB-> FRNT) CENTER ->CENTER SWFR -> SWFR SL/SR -> SL/SR ( ---> SB ) </> : Select / : Up/Down Note If ZONE2 AMP (page 64) is set to “ON”, no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external decoder to 6 channels. FRNT If you selected “8ch”, you can select analog audio jacks to which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, V-AUX CENTER Use to select where the signals input to the CENTER jack will be output. Choices: CENTER, FRONT • Select “CENTER” to output the signals from the center speaker. • Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. SWFR Use to select where the signals input to the SUBWOOFER jack will be output. Choices: SWFR, FRONT • Select “SWFR” to output the signals from the subwoofer. • Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. SL/SR Use to select where the signals input to the SURROUND jacks will be output. Choices: SL/SR, FRONT • Select “SL/SR” to output the signals from the surround speakers. • Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. 62 / : Up/Down </> : Select p p 6ch/8ch This setting is used to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6ch, 8ch . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;AUTO V CONV.;;;;;;;ON CMPNT OSD;;;;;ON Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) • Press h to lower the position of the OSD. • Press l to raise the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Selecting “AUTO” for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. If “OFF” is selected, information can only be displayed on the screen when a video signal is being input. Choices: AUTO, OFF Note If GRAY BACK is set to “OFF”, information cannot be displayed when only component signals are being input. SET MENU Video conversion V CONV. Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output converted video signals from the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. • Select “ON” to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the parameter values have been changed from their initial settings. C)PARAM. INI Notes • Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (composite or S-video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Component OSD CMPNT OSD Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when using SET MENU, the test tone or the parameter functions. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Note 1 2 3 *4 *5 6 7 8 9 *0 Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY GUARD is set to ON. ■ Speaker impedance setting D)SP IMP.SET Use to select the impedance of your speakers. Choices: 6ohms, 8ohms D)SP IMP.SET Minimum 8ohms SET MENU functions even when “OFF” is selected. / : Exit </> : Select p p ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON B)MEMORY GUARD [OFF ON p p / : Exit </> : Select Select “ON” to protect: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • All speaker levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Note When MEMORY GUARD is set to “ON”, you cannot use the test tone or select any other SET MENU items. 63 SET MENU ■ Zone set E)ZONE SET E)ZONE SET SP B;;;;;;MAIN p p / : Exit </> : Main Notes • If you select “ZONE B” and connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. ■ Zone 2 set F)ZONE2 SET (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) F)ZONE2 SET OUTPUT VOL;;VAR. ZONE2 AMP....OFF p p / : Up/Down </> : Select Output volume OUTPUT VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: VAR., FIX • Select “VAR.” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume simultaneously with VOL –/+ on the remote control. • Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. 64 ■ Zone 3 set G)ZONE3 SET (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) G)ZONE3 SET OUTPUT VOL;;VAR. / : Exit </> : Select p p Speakers B SP B Use to specify the location of speakers connected the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: MAIN, ZONE B • Select “MAIN” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “OFF” if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select “ON” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. Output volume OUTPUT VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 3 OUT jacks. Choices: VAR., FIX • Select “VAR.” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUT volume simultaneously with VOL –/+ on the remote control. • Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 3 OUT volume level to a standard line level. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a Learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Display window SELECT PRESET AMP/SOURCE/ TV Set to AMP to operate this unit. Set to SOURCE to operate the component selected with an input selector button. Set to TV to operate the television. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 6 7 STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON B POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP POWER POWER PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE TVCD CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD MULTI AV CH IN SELECT PRESET AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT TV PRESET + + MUTE TV VOL LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU – CH PURE DIRECT – TV MUTE Display window ENTER TVNIGHT INPUT AUDIO LEVEL TITLE CLEAR RE–NAME SET MENU MENU TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT NIGHT EFFECT ENTER STEREO HALL 1 2 Component control area You can control up to 14 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 76). ENTERTAIN JAZZ ROCK 3 4 TEST ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START LEARN A STANDBY A/B/C/D/E EXTD. SUR +10 DISC SKIP MACRO AV 8 REC ON POWER TV RETURN TV THTR MUSIC 5 6 THX SURROUND 9 0 MOVIE 7 1 +10 ENTERTAIN EON REC HALL SUR. BACK 2 MUSIC 5 6 THX STANDARD 9 0 MODE PTY SEEK START FREQ/RDS ON MACRO LEARN JAZZ ROCK 3 4 TV THTR MOVIE ENT. DISC SKIP OFF DISPLAY 8 STEREO FREQ/RDS AUDIO ON SCREEN ADVANCED OPERATION THX SYSTEM POWER STRAIGHT STEREO OFF A/B buttons and the input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A/B buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...LD player B...Tape deck SELECT k/n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. AUDIO ENTER TEST 5 The buttons inside the dotted lines control this unit in any mode (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, INPUT MODE, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, PURE DIRECT and STRAIGHT/ EFFECT). CLEAR CHP/INDEX EON 7 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START RE–NAME REC DISC SKIP English 65 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area) OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. Remote Control Code Default Settings Notes • You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 68 to program buttons operated within this component control area. • The OPTN area cannot be used when AMP1Z or NO is selected in the amplifier library (see page 67). * Input area Library (Component category) Default YAMAHA code* A LD 2200 B TAPE 2700, (2701) PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER 2600, (0203, 1203, 1358, 2601) CD CD 2300, (2301) MULTI CH INPUT DVD 2102, (0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101) V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD 2500, (2501, 2502) CD-R CD-R 2400 DTV TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807 DVD DVD 2102, (0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101) Additional YAMAHA codes available are given in parentheses. Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 66 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 Note “0000” appears in the display window if no code has been set. 5 3 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. Press the numeric buttons to enter the fourdigit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. STEREO LEARN 6 y If you want to setup for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component. Notes ROCK 3 4 TY THTR MOVIE 7 5 6 THX STANDARD 9 0 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN ADVANCED OPERATION * JAZZ 2 MUSIC y • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner), L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite), L:VCR HALL 1 ENTERTAIN The amplifier library (L:AMP) code is preset to “AMP1” (2000) in order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by entering one of the following five codes if necessary. AMP1 AMP1Z NO Function Code To operate this unit. 2000 To operate ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 features. (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) 2001 To operate other manufacturers’ receivers / amplifiers using this unit’s remote control 2004 67 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the remote control code is correct. TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME y If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) Use the Learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 65). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Note This remote control transmits infrared beams. If the other remote control also uses infrared beams, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control.) Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 3 Press an input selector button to select a source component. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. MULTI CH IN SLEEP SYSTEM AV CD INPUT MODE TRANSMIT B DVD CD-R POWER TV TUNER MD/TAPE STANDBY A DVR/VCR2 POWER PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV V-AUX SELECT 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 68 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. 7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 5 Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER TRANSMIT CD INPUT MODE SYSTEM B AV TUNER CD-R POWER A MD/TAPE TV PHONO CBL/SAT POWER V-AUX SELECT TV AMP SOURCE DVD + DVR/VCR2 – VOL VCR 1 + PURE DIRECT AUDIO NIGHT STRAIGHT DTV – CH PRESET – MUTE MENU SET MENU DISPLAY ON SCREEN + TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E ENTER TV VOL TV MUTE TITLE LEVEL TEST RETURN 6 • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER TRANSMIT CD INPUT MODE SYSTEM B DVD CD-R AV TUNER MD/TAPE POWER A DVR/VCR2 TV PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV SELECT V-AUX ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. “NG” appears in the display window if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5 and 6. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 6. 69 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Changing source names in the display window 5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. ENTER 6 AMP SOURCE TV Press ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. y 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD If you continuously want to rename another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming mode. RE-NAME Note 3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press RE-NAME again. 4 Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. (Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.) ENTER 70 “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 72). Press a macro button CD To automatically transmit these signals in order SYSTEM POWER CD Macro buttons First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY — — (CD area) SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER POWER — — — — — — — — A B PHONO PHONO TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN — V-AUX V-AUX — CBL/SAT — CBL/SAT — (*3) — (CD area) (*2) SYSTEM POWER MD/TAPE MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE area) (*2) (*1) CD-R DTV DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD ADVANCED OPERATION CD-R (CD-R area) (*2) — (VCR 1 area) (*2) (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*2) (DVD area) (*2) *1 You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.) *2 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that component (see page 68) or set a remote control code (see page 66). *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. 71 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Macro operations ■ Programming macro operations Macro buttons TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME You can program your own macros and use the macro feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. Notes MACRO ON/OFF 1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. 2 Press a macro button. MACRO • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. Notes • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 72 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. Clearing function sets You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, renamed source names and setup remote control codes. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B PHONO TUNER V-AUX DTV STANDBY 2 POWER MCR 2: AV POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SOURCE TV 2 MCR 1: DVD 1 FREQ/RDS EON Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window. MODE PTY SEEK START CLEAR REC 3 DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR MCR 3: h RE–NAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. Indicates the number of macro steps entered 3 L:DVD Note 5 Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code(s) and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR y Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). Note “L:ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. 73 ADVANCED OPERATION (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. L:ALL Clears all learned functions. M:ALL Clears all programmed macros RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. Flashes alternately so you can set the next step To change the selected source component, press SELECT k/n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k/n only changes the selected component and corresponding component control area. Press k / n to select the clear mode. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. CLEAR Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Clearing individual functions ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 74 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a macro function 4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP DVD SOURCE TV REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. y MACRO • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. 6 Press LEARN again to exit. Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the macro programming mode. 5 Press MACRO again to exit. Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. 75 ADVANCED OPERATION y REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling each component Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 SOURCE TRANSMIT POWER TV AV STANDBY CH VOL – – – POWER TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 7 8 + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE 9 TV MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR 5 6 7 THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON AMP + TV INPUT 6 SELECT PRESET 3 TV VOL SYSTEM POWER 0 A MOVIE 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. B MODE PTY SEEK START REC A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE 4 TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU DISC SKIP PURE DIRECT 5 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME NIGHT AUDIO ENTER 1 2 3 7 8 9 0 A B *1 *2 *3 *4 ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder Cable TV/ TV Satellite tuner LD player CD player MD recorder/ CD recorder Tape deck Tuner AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 Power *1 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV VOL + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV VOL – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 CH + TV channel + *2 Channel + Channel + Channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 PRESET + CH – TV channel – *2 Channel – Channel – Channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 PRESET – TV INPUT/ A/B/C/D/E TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Direction A/B A/B/C/D/E *2 *2 *2 Mute *2 *2 *2 TV MUTE 4 5 6 TEST TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute *2 TITLE MENU Menu Menu Menu ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select k Menu up Menu up Menu up n Menu down Menu down Menu down l Menu left Menu left Menu left h Menu right Menu right Menu right RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search backward *3 VCR search backward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward EON *4 b Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward a Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 VCR rec *3 s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 VCR stop *3 Stop Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause VCR pause *3 VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Pause Play VCR play *3 VCR play *3 Play Play Play Play Display Display Index Index h Play Audio DISPLAY Display ENTER Title/Index Title TV mute Title AUDIO Title *2 Title Preset stations (1-8) Search backward FREQ *4 Skip backward Direction back PTY MODE *4 Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward PTY START *4 Disc skip Rec Rec Skip backward Audio Enter Display Display Enter/recall Enter/ Chapter/Time numeric button Display This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area. These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1. These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only. 76 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2/Zone 3 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. IN OUT IN OUT CONTROL OUT This unit ■ System configuration and connection example Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, set ZONE2 AMP to “OFF” in SET MENU. ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT ADVANCED OPERATION SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver MONITOR OUT CD player (or other component) This unit MAIN SYSTEM AUDIO IN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 Infrared emitter Main room REMOTE OUT Second room Third room ZONE 2 REMOTE IN ZONE 3 REMOTE IN Notes 77 English • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 01EN06_Advns_RXV1500U.fm Page 78 Wednesday, March 9, 2005 7:20 PM ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, set ZONE2 AMP to ON in SET MENU (see page 64). R L + – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 Second room This unit Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second/third room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. ■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3 1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window. SELECT ■ To enable Zone mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/ – to control the selected room. or 1 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in “Setting remote control codes” on page 66. 2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or Zone 3 power on. 2 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”. 3 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second/third room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. ENTER A 3 Press ENTER. “2000” appears in the display window. 4 Enter the code number “2001”. 5 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. 6 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3. LEARN 78 B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Note Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to Zone 2/Zone 3. ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ■ Turning this unit to either on or standby 4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– buttons. SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN SELECT AMP V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV * A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby individually. • When System mode is selected, or when “AMP1” is selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to on/ standby simultaneously. PURE DIRECT LCD display * 5 VOLUME +/– can be used only when OUTPUT VOL is set to VAR. in SET MENU (see page 64). Normal mode* Name of component Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2/ Zone 3 mode. Notes • The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are always the same. • “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed. Turns the main unit on/standby Zone 2 mode “ZONE2” or “2:name of component” Turns Zone 2 to on/ standby Zone 3 mode “ZONE3” or “3:name of component” Turns Zone 3 to on/ standby System mode “SYSTM” * SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Turns everything (the main unit, Zone 2, Zone 3) on/standby “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. ■ Special considerations for DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS encoded discs. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/ Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 79 ADVANCED OPERATION For DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second/third room. Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. TV MUTE SYSTEM ■ Elements of a sound field Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 + JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 – THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON VOL – – 8 3 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START REC + CH ROCK DVD 1 SOURCE TV VOL 4,5 2 EFFECT HALL AMP + STRAIGHT DISPLAY STEREO SELECT TV DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME A/B/C/D/E 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. POWER TV ENTER In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. POWER Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN DISPLAY 3 Select the sound field program you want to adjust. ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 THX STANDARD 9 0 Program No. 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. Program name P04 ROCK CONCERT Cursor DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB > INIT.DLY;;;;15ms ROOM SIZE;;;;1.0 LIVENESS;;;;;;;5 REV.TIME;;;;1.6s REV.DELAY;;120ms Parameters 80 Parameter values EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 4 Press k / n to select the parameters. ENTER 5 6 Press l / h to change the parameter value. When you set a parameter to a value other than the factory preset, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. ENTER Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to change other program parameters. Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD is set to “ON”. If you want to change the parameter values, set MEMORY GUARD to “OFF” (see page 63). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ■ Resetting parameters to the factory values To reset a certain parameter Select the parameter you want to reset, then press l / h repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter name disappears from the video monitor. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To reset all parameters Use PARAM.INI (see page 63). 81 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. –6 dB – +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY/P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 – 99 msec Source Sound Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time INIT. DLY INIT. DLY Time INIT. DLY Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 – 2.0 Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Source Sound Time Sound Source Small value = 0.1 82 Large value = 2.0 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 – 10 Source Sound Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 ■ SB INI. DLY (Surround back initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 83 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems. Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound Source REV.TIME Short Reverberation 60 dB REV.TIME Long Reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 – 250 msec Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Source Sound REV. LEVEL Time 84 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3. For 7ch Stereo Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level) ■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level) ■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level) ■ PL LEVEL (Presence left level) ■ PR LEVEL (Presence right level) For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music ■ PANORAMA Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ CENTER WIDTH Function: Control range: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For PRO LOGIC IIx Music, Movie and Game ■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx) Function: Choices: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources. PLII, PLIIx ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For DTS Neo:6 Music ■ C. IMAGE (Center image) Function: Control range: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 0 – 1.0 For THX Cinema ■ DEC (2ch Decoder Select) Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema. PRO LOGIC / PLII Movie / Neo:6 Cinema 85 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On-screen display does not appear. No sound No picture 86 Cause Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 25 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full or short display mode. 50 GRAY BACK in the SET MENU is set to “OFF”, and no video signal is currently being received. Set GRAY BACK to “AUTO” to always show the OSD. 62 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. — The input mode is set to “DTS” or “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO”. 40 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons. 33 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 33 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 35 The input mode is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 40 The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 63 13–16 18–21 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Refer to page 25 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 35 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13 Incorrect balance settings in the SET MENU. Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings. 57 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on. 39 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 34 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 57 CENTER SP in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 55 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 34 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 57 SURR L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 56 A monaural or stereo source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SBch SELECT. 60 SURR L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. If the surround left and right speakers are set to “NONE”, surround back speakers are automatically set to “NONE”. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 56 SURR B L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. Select “SMLx1”, “SMLx2”, “LRGx1” or “LRGx2”. 56 LFE/BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 56 LFE/BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel source is being played. Select “BOTH”. 56 No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. No sound from the center speaker. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy The source does not contain low bass signals. 87 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 40 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 21 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 21 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 18–21 The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 18–21 The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. MEMORY GUARD in the SET MENU is set to “ON”. Select “OFF”. 63 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 88 Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or DTS sources. TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy There is noise interference from digital or radiofrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or radio-frequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. There is noise when the OSD is displayed. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. Refer to page Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The OSD may be disturbed when displaying OSD through component video connections. Select OFF in CMPNT OSD. 63 The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Cause Remedy Refer to page Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 23 Use the manual tuning method. 41 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 23 Use the manual tuning method. 41 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 42 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 41 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. 89 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. 90 Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly. 66 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. 66 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 68 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 68 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 73 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. It provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels. An additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with a previously unheard of excitement and realism. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “flyaround” effects. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx ■ Neo:6 ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation comparable to digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. 91 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling 6.1 or 7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. GLOSSARY ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sound field programs ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 92 GLOSSARY Audio information ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering studios. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX). Adaptive decorrelation In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre. Re-equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment. 93 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Timbre matching The human ear changes our perception of sound depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The timbre matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. GLOSSARY ■ THX Select Before any home theatre component can be THX Select certified, it must incorporate pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. ■ THX Surround EX THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology can be found at www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener. 94 Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 120 W • Video Signal Type ............................................................PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [Australia, China, Korea, Asia and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................170 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General models] 8/6/4/2 Ω .........................................................155/195/250/330 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................170 W • Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 60 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-video ................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................125 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02% CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04% AM SECTION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................................... 81 dB [Other models] ....................................................................... 86 dB CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................................ 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency........................................... 3.5 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz [General model] ............... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ................................... AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [Asia and General models] (AC 240 V/50 Hz) ......... 0.8 W or less [Other models] ......................................................... 0.5 W or less • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 433.5 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”) • Weight .................................................................. 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs) 95 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω ZONE 2 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models] ............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 3 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models] ............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES AMPLIFIER AMSTRAD 0105 ARCAM 0296 AUDIOLAB 0296 CARVER 0296 GE 0105 GENEXXA 0422 GRUNDIG 0296 HARMAN/KARDON 0919 JVC 0358 LEFT COAST 0919 LINN 0296 MAGNAVOX 0296 MARANTZ 0296, 0919 MICROMEGA 0296 MYRYAD 0296 OPTIMUS 0422 PANASONIC 0335 PHILIPS 0296, 0919 PIONEER 0040 POLK AUDIO 0296, 0919 REALISTIC 0422 REVOX 0296 SONY 0247 SOUNDESIGN 0105 TECHNICS 0335 THORENS 0296 VICTOR 0358 WARDS 0040, 0105 YAMAHA 0381 CABLE ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 i PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 CD PLAYER AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER 0699 JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 KENWOOD 0517, 0561 KOSS LG LIMIT MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MEMOREX MICO MICROSOFT MINTEK MITSUBISHI MUSTEK NESA ONKYO ORITRON PALSONIC PANASONIC PHILIPS 0678 0768 0795 0530, 0702 0566 0858 0750 0549 0744 0548 0757 0744 0530 0678 0699 0517, 0659, 1389 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101, 2102 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER TOSHIBA YAMAHA 2800, 2801, 2802 2808 2804, 2805, 2806 2803 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN YAMAHA 0091 0086 0091 0086 0086 0086 0086 0091 0086 0091 0228 0086 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 1417 0101 0041, 0185 0203, 1203, 1358, 2600, 2601 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT 1327 ABSAT 0150 ALBA 0482 ALPHASTAR 0799 AMSTRAD 0874 ASTON 0169, 1156 ASTRO 0200 ATSAT 1327 AVALON 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH 1127 PACE 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS PIONEER POLK AUDIO RCA REVOX SANSUI SONY THORENS WARDS YAMAHA 0056 0054 0056 0054 0056 0056 0270 0056 0054 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 ASA 0131 AWA 0036 ACURA 0036 ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680 ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490 ADVENT 0788 AIKO 0119 AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 AKURA 0291 ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 ii CIMLINE CINERAL CITIZEN CLARION CLARIVOX CLATRONIC CONDOR CONRAC CONTEC CRAIG CROSLEY CROWN 0036 0119, 0478 0057, 0087, 0119 0207 0064 0274, 0397 0347, 0397 0835 0036, 0207 0207 0081 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 iii GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI 0036, 0064 HISAWA 0482 HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 HUA TUN 0036 HUANYU 0401 HYPSON 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445 INDIANA 0064 INFINITY 0081 INGELEN 0190 INNO HIT 0543 INNOVA 0064 INTEQ 0044 INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064 MEGATRON 0172, 0205 MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 METZ 0474 MICROMAXX 0835 MICROSTAR 0835 MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078 MINERVA 0514 MINOKA 0439 MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 SEMIVOX 0207 SEMP 0183 SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677 SHEN YING 0036, 0119 SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263 SIAREM 0543 SIEMENS 0064, 0222 SINUDYNE 0543 SKANTIC 0383 SKYGIANT 0207 SKYWORTH 0064 SOLAVOX 0190 SONITRON 0235 SONOKO 0036, 0064 SONOLOR 0190, 0235 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445 SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW 0198 STANDARD 0036 STARLITE 0207 STERN 0190, 0286 SUPREME 0027 SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198 SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207 SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 SYSLINE 0064 T+A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCI 0044 TVS 0490 TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205 TAI YI 0036 TANDY 0120, 0190 TASHIKO 0119, 0677 TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 TEC 0274 TECHNEMA 0347 TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677 TECHWOOD 0078 TECO 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER 0347 TELETECH 0036 TENSAI 0347 TERA 0057 THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 THORN 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH 0543 TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119 UHER 0347 UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0796, 0860, 2900, 2901, 2902 YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON 0062 CARVER 0108 CIMLINE CINERAL CITIZEN COLT COMBITECH CRAIG 0099 0305 0064, 0305, 1305 0099 0379 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC JENSEN KEC KLH KAISUI KENWOOD KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LG 0068, 0072, 0094 0068 0064, 0305 0099 0099 0068, 0094 0062, 0064 0068, 0070 0099 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 MINOLTA 0069 MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 iv 1500_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 9, 2005 3:47 PM U PHILCO PHILIPS 0062 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 RX-V1500 AV Receiver © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER'S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WD64170-1